Nemo Outdoor Manual 712x3o

WWW.ANITE.COM/NEMO

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

DOCUMENT NUMBER NNNNNNNNN ISSUE N

© Anite 2015

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Copyright The information contained in this document is confidential and no part of it may be copied or reproduced in any form without the written consent of Anite Network Testing. Additionally, this document is not to be ed to or discussed with third parties without the prior written permission of Anite Network Testing. Anite’s products are subject to continual development and specifications may change. s of Anite’s products and documentation should exercise their own independent judgement to evaluate the suitability of Anite’s products and documentation for their particular use. Anite does not accept any liability arising from the application or use of the product or this documentation. All reasonable care has been made to ensure that this document is accurate. If you have any comments on this document, or would like details of any Anite products, services or equipment, please us through the Anite website.

Page 2

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

CONTENTS

1 QUICK GUIDE .................................................................................................. 9 1.1

Setting up the system ............................................................................... 9

1.2

Data measurements ................................................................................ 10

1.3

Using Nemo Outdoor ............................................................................... 12

1.3.1

Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options .................................. 12

2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ........................................................................................ 13 2.1

Licensing ............................................................................................... 14

2.1.1

Migration process for old USB dongle keys .......................................... 15

2.1.2

Migration process for new USB dongle keys ......................................... 17

2.1.3

Technical expiration.............................................................. 18

2.2

Important .............................................................................................. 18

2.2.1

Local laws and regulations ................................................................ 19

2.2.2

Nemo Outdoor laptop settings ........................................................... 19

2.2.3

Traffic safety .................................................................................. 20

2.2.4

Operating environment .................................................................... 21

3 NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................ 22 3.1

Voice testing .......................................................................................... 22

3.2

Circuit-switched data testing ..................................................................... 22

3.3

Packet-switched data testing .................................................................... 22

3.4

Nemo Media Router ................................................................................. 23

3.4.1

Installing Nemo Media Router ............................................................ 23

3.4.2

Updating the Nemo Media Router SW and license ................................. 26

3.4.3

TeamViewer Quick ................................................................ 27

3.5

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite........................................................................... 29

3.6

Nemo Invex II ........................................................................................ 30

3.7

Indoor measurements .............................................................................. 31

4 INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM............................................................... 32 4.1

Hardware and software requirements ......................................................... 32

4.2

Other hardware requirements ................................................................... 32

4.3

Nemo Outdoor software installation ........................................................... 33

4.4

Nemo Outdoor device set-up..................................................................... 33

4.4.1

Connecting a GPS receiver ................................................................ 33

4.4.2

Connecting a scanner ....................................................................... 34

4.4.3

Connecting voice quality devices ........................................................ 34

4.5

Nemo Invex device set-up ........................................................................ 34

4.5.1

Page 3

Nemo Invex Status view ................................................................... 38

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

4.5.2 4.6

Two data connections on one measurement server ............................... 39

General guidelines for drive testing ............................................................ 40

5 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ............................................................................. 43 5.1

Configuring Nemo Outdoor ....................................................................... 43

5.1.1

Configuration through Welcome page ................................................. 43

5.1.2

Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog ........................ 47

5.1.3

Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually .................................................. 49

5.1.4

Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup ........ 49

5.2

Configuring test mobiles ........................................................................... 50

5.3

Configuration Manager ............................................................................. 51

5.3.1

Handler information ......................................................................... 52

5.3.2

interface ................................................................................. 52

5.3.3

Notifications ................................................................................... 64

5.3.4

Scripts ........................................................................................... 68

5.3.5

Base station files ............................................................................. 69

5.3.6

Device configurations ....................................................................... 69

5.3.7

Devices .......................................................................................... 70

5.3.8

View groups.................................................................................... 76

5.4

Measurement Properties dialog.................................................................. 76

5.4.1

Measurement Properties – General ..................................................... 77

5.4.2

Measurement Properties – Measurement ............................................. 78

5.4.3

Measurement Properties – Frequency scanning with mobiles .................. 82

5.4.4

Measurement Properties – Pilot scanning with mobiles .......................... 85

5.4.5 Measurement Properties – Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning with scanners .................................................................................................... 85 5.4.6

Measurement Properties - Script ........................................................ 86

6 DURING MEASUREMENTS................................................................................. 87 6.1

Textual notes.......................................................................................... 87

6.2

Nemo Commander remote control option for Nemo Outdoor/ Invex ................ 88

6.2.1

Nemo Commander server options ...................................................... 89

6.2.2

Initial field unit configuration ............................................................. 90

6.2.3

Measurement workflow..................................................................... 90

6.2.4

Events reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander ..... 91

6.3

Making scanning measurements ................................................................ 92

6.3.1

With a scanner ................................................................................ 92

6.3.2

With a mobile ................................................................................. 92

6.4

Making voice calls ................................................................................... 92

6.4.1

Voice Call Configuration .................................................................... 93

6.4.2

Voice Call Properties – TETRA ............................................................ 97

6.4.3

Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing ................................................................ 98

6.5

Voice quality measurements ................................................................... 101

6.6

Making video calls ................................................................................. 102

6.7

Data transfers ...................................................................................... 104

6.7.1

Page 4

Configuring the data connection ...................................................... 105

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.7.2

Configuring the FTP protocol ........................................................... 110

6.7.3

Configuring the SFTP protocol ......................................................... 113

6.7.4

Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol ..................................................... 115

6.7.5

Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol ......................................... 118

6.7.6

Configuring the POP3 protocol ......................................................... 120

6.7.7

Configuring the SMTP protocol ......................................................... 121

6.7.8

Configuring the IMAP protocol ......................................................... 124

6.7.9

Configuring the WAP protocol .......................................................... 126

6.7.10 Configuring the streaming protocol .................................................. 128 6.7.11 Configuring the trace route protocol ................................................. 129 6.7.12 Making data transfers .................................................................... 131 6.8

Streaming video quality testing ............................................................... 132

6.8.1 6.9

PEVQ-S Properties dialog ................................................................ 134

VoIP calls ............................................................................................. 135

6.10 Application testing ................................................................................. 138 6.10.1 Facebook testing ........................................................................... 138 6.10.2 Twitter testing .............................................................................. 141 6.10.3 Instagram testing .......................................................................... 145 6.10.4 Dropbox testing ............................................................................ 148 6.11 SMS testing .......................................................................................... 151 6.11.1 SMS testing with CDMA terminals .................................................... 152 6.12 MMS testing ......................................................................................... 153 6.12.1 Packet session settings for MMS ...................................................... 153 6.12.2 MMS Editor dialog .......................................................................... 155 6.12.3 Making MMS measurements ............................................................ 155 6.12.4 MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 .................................... 156 6.13 USSD testing ........................................................................................ 160 6.14 Start external application ....................................................................... 161 6.15 ICMP Ping ............................................................................................ 162 6.16 Indoor mode ........................................................................................ 164 6.16.1 Viewing indoor maps ...................................................................... 165 6.16.2 Floorplans and BTS files ................................................................. 167 6.16.3 Multiple routes and floorplans .......................................................... 169 6.16.4 Indoor route planning .................................................................... 170 6.16.5 iBwave maps ................................................................................ 171 6.16.6 DAS anomaly analysis .................................................................... 175 6.16.7 RF ingress analysis ........................................................................ 177 6.16.8 Indoor map popup menu ................................................................ 178 6.17 Measurement profiles ............................................................................ 186 6.18 IP packet capturing ............................................................................... 186 6.19 Making script files ................................................................................. 187 6.19.1 Script transfer stop commands ........................................................ 189 6.19.2 Add menu .................................................................................... 192 6.19.3 Running scripts ............................................................................. 203 6.20 Measurement lists ................................................................................. 204

Page 5

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.20.1 Measurement areas ....................................................................... 208 6.21 Forcing functions ................................................................................... 209 6.21.1 Channel locking ............................................................................. 210 6.21.2 Band locking ................................................................................. 211 6.21.3 Network selection .......................................................................... 212 6.21.4 Handover control ........................................................................... 213 6.21.5 Cell barring................................................................................... 219 6.21.6 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode) ......................................... 219 6.21.7 AMR codec forcing ......................................................................... 220 6.22 Cell testing ........................................................................................... 220 6.23 Missing Neighbor Detection ..................................................................... 221 6.23.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile .......................................... 222 6.23.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile ............ 223 6.24 Pilot pollution analysis............................................................................ 225 6.24.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone ................................... 226 6.24.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements ............ 228 6.24.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones ........................... 228 6.24.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners .................................. 229 6.25 GSM interference analysis ...................................................................... 229 6.26 Band scan ............................................................................................ 231 6.27 Timeslot testing .................................................................................... 234 6.28 Viewing graphs ..................................................................................... 236 6.28.1 Graph popup menu ........................................................................ 237 6.28.2 Zoom - Scatter graph..................................................................... 240 6.28.3 Graph side - Layers ............................................................... 241 6.28.4 Graph side – Values and parameter ......................................... 248 6.28.5 Graph layer color configuration ........................................................ 250 6.28.6 Spectrum graphs ........................................................................... 254 6.28.7 Color grid graphs ........................................................................... 256 6.28.8 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph .................................... 256 6.29 Viewing grids ........................................................................................ 257 6.29.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message ................... 258 6.29.2 Grid popup menu .......................................................................... 258 6.30 Viewing maps ....................................................................................... 282 6.30.1 Base stations on a map .................................................................. 284 6.30.2 MapX maps .................................................................................. 286 6.30.3 Route plans .................................................................................. 288 6.30.4 Map popup menu........................................................................... 291 6.30.5 Color Set Editor ............................................................................. 315 6.30.6 Map example 1 ............................................................................. 318 6.30.7 Map example 2 ............................................................................. 319 6.30.8 Map example 3 ............................................................................. 320 6.30.9 Map example 4 ............................................................................. 321 6.30.10 Map example 5 ............................................................................. 322 6.30.11 Map Example 6 ............................................................................. 324

Page 6

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.31 Export/import settings ........................................................................... 326 6.31.1 Export settings to file ..................................................................... 326 6.31.2 Export settings to FTP server .......................................................... 327 6.31.3 Import settings from file ................................................................. 328 6.31.4 Import settings from FTP server ...................................................... 329 7 ENDING MEASUREMENTS ............................................................................... 331 7.1

Measurement report .............................................................................. 332

8 MEASUREMENT RESULTS ............................................................................... 334 8.1

Analyzing measurement results ............................................................... 334

8.2

Playing back measurement files............................................................... 334

8.2.1

Selecting playback files .................................................................. 334

8.2.2

During playback ............................................................................ 335

8.2.3

Viewing and moving markers .......................................................... 336

8.2.4

Closing playback files ..................................................................... 337

8.3

ing measurement files to server ..................................................... 337

8.3.1

FTP Options .................................................................................. 338

8.3.2

Nemo Xynergy Options ................................................................... 339

8.4

Exporting measurements ........................................................................ 340

9 INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 344 9.1

View groups ......................................................................................... 344

9.2

Menu bar ............................................................................................. 345

9.3

Toolbar ................................................................................................ 345

9.4

Status bar ............................................................................................ 345

9.5

Nemo Outdoor menus ............................................................................ 345

9.5.1

File menu ..................................................................................... 346

9.5.2

Edit menu .................................................................................... 347

9.5.3

View menu ................................................................................... 347

9.5.4

Measurement menu ....................................................................... 348

9.5.5

Remote menu ............................................................................... 349

9.5.6

Playback menu .............................................................................. 350

9.5.7

Data menu ................................................................................... 350

9.5.8

Window menu ............................................................................... 351

9.5.9

Help menu.................................................................................... 351

9.6

Parameters view ................................................................................... 352

9.6.1

Page 7

Parameters view search functionality ................................................ 353

9.7

Customizing menus and toolbars ............................................................. 353

9.8

Nemo Outdoor windows ......................................................................... 356

9.8.1

Custom windows ........................................................................... 357

9.8.2

Devices view ................................................................................. 358

9.8.3

Device Status view ........................................................................ 360

9.8.4

Output window .............................................................................. 362

9.8.5

Script Status window ..................................................................... 362

9.8.6

Controlling windows ....................................................................... 362

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

10 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................... 364 10.1 Low throughput .................................................................................... 364 10.1.1 All Windows versions ..................................................................... 365 10.2 Device Status view ................................................................................ 368 10.3 Cannot add devices ............................................................................... 368 10.4 Required license option missing ............................................................... 369 10.5 Cannot make calls/packet transfers ......................................................... 369 10.6 Measurement file checksum notification .................................................... 369 10.7 Number of USB devices exceeded ............................................................ 369 11 NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS ............................................................................ 371 11.1 Toolbar buttons .................................................................................... 371 11.2 Dialog buttons ...................................................................................... 372 11.3 Graph toolbar buttons ............................................................................ 373 11.4 Map toolbar buttons .............................................................................. 374 12 SHORTCUT KEYS .......................................................................................... 376 13 NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS ............................................................................... 377 14 TECHNICAL .................................................................................... 380 14.1 Club ............................................................................................. 380 14.2 Nemo Portal ............................................................................. 380 14.3 Phone and Email ....................................................................... 380 15 APPENDIX 1 ................................................................................................. 382 15.1 Making MapInfo® raster maps ................................................................. 382 15.1.1 ing a raster map with MapInfo® SW ...................................... 382 16 APPENDIX 2 ................................................................................................. 384 16.1 CDMA settings and PRL editing in Nemo Outdoor ....................................... 384 17 END- LICENSE AGREEMENT .................................................................... 388

Page 8

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

1

QUICK GUIDE

This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and how to start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed explanations on using Nemo Outdoor.

1.1

Setting up the system ♦

Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install Nemo Outdoor without it. Software-based licenses are not available.

♦

Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires rights.

♦

Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability! 1.

Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (see Hardware and software requirements). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation program Nemo Outdoor.exe. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in the same setup.

2.

When the installation is finished, restart the computer.

3.

The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the computer’s USB ports.

4.

If you are making data measurements, you need to configure the measurement devices and install drivers. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide provided in the Nemo Outdoor package.

5.

On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in online mode, or decide to work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking the work offline

button in Nemo Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection

functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool automatically detects devices connected to the computer and assigns the appropriate, previously created COM ports to them. 6.

To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog).

Page 9

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

7.

If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a premade device configuration and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device later. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the work offline button

8.

in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online of offline mode. Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements. You can also do this from the configuration manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). In addition, you can also use the Autodetect devices functionality by going to Measurement | Autodetect Devices, which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports.

9.

Open the Configuration Manager dialog (Ctrl+M) to add measurement devices manually. Select the Device item and click the Add button

. Select the device type (phone, scanner,

GPS) that you want to add and select the device model from the list. Click Next. In the Device Configuration dialog, select the correct COM ports and click OK. 10. If you are using a GPS receiver, you will also need a map. Use the Windows® Explorer to copy all the required map files to the maps folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\maps. Define the default map file and map folder as follows: open the Configuration Manager dialog, double-click the Interface item and select the Paths tab. In the Map field, browse the folder where map files are stored. In the Default map field, browse the default map file (see Interface Properties – Paths). 11. If you have base station files (.nbf or .csv), copy them to the BTS files folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files. When you want to view a BTS file on a map, open the Measurement Properties dialog for the measurement mobile used, and browse a file in the BTS File field. Click OK. Open a map through the Data menu and the BTS icons should appear on the map.

1.2

Data measurements ♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

♦

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to configure the measurement mobile.

Setting up data measurements: 1.

Configure the measurement device in the Device Configuration dialog (see Device configuration for mobiles and modems). Define the Trace and Modem Ports and select a data connection.

2.

Open the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement). Please note that the selection is device-specific.

Page 10

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3.

For circuit-switched data measurements, double-click the Circuit-Switched Data Call item to define Data Call Properties. For packet-switched data calls, double-click the Packet Session item to define Packet session settings.

4.

Select and configure a data protocol in by double-clicking the item under ed Data Protocols.

5.

To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements), double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (see ICMP Ping).

6.

To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements), double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Testing Settings (see SMS testing).

7.

To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements), double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the MMS Settings (see MMS testing).

8.

To set up USSD measurements (can be performed simultaneously with data measurements), double-click the USSD Message field and define the USSD Message Settings (see USSD testing).

9.

Page 11

Click OK. You can now start data measurements.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

1.3

Using Nemo Outdoor When a green light is blinking in the Device Status window, the device is connected properly and is ready for measurements. 1.

First, open some measurement windows through the Data menu for monitoring the measurement. Alternatively you can open a workspace (File | Open Workspace) that contains some predefined views (graphs, grids, maps, etc.).

2.

You can use Scripts (see Scripts) to generate a sequence of actions that Nemo Outdoor will execute automatically. Click the Device script settings button

in the Devices view.

Select an existing script in the Script File field or create a new one by clicking the Script Editor button. 3.

If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement, use the Notifications function (see Notifications). Click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view to access the Notifications dialog.

4.

Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button

. Nemo Outdoor will start the

recording automatically. To stop running the script, click the button again. To finish both the recording and the script, click the Stop button 5.

.

To perform measurements manually, select the appropriate actions, such as, start voice call or send MMS message, from the Measurement control

6.

Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button

menu.

. Nemo Outdoor has recorded a

measurement file of the performed test calls/scan on the computer’s hard disk. You can playback the measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog. Click the Rename button to change the file name. 7.

Click the Start Playback button button

to playback a file. During playback use the Pause

to freeze the playback and observe the different measurement windows for that

particular point in time.

1.3.1

Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options Outdoor s the following command line options. These command lines will enable the to enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. You can enter the command lines either with Command Prompt through Start | Run | cmd, or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on the desktop and enter the command line to the shortcut’s Properties | Shortcut |Target field. •

/W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor

•

/H will directly open the given hardware configuration in Nemo Outdoor

•

/M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode, in which the is not able to save any changes made to the hardware configuration or workspace

•

/DEBUGBIN will start debug logging

For example, the command line below will start Nemo Outdoor, load the test.worx workspace, N95.hwcx hardware configuration, and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking effect. •

Page 12

Outdoor /W test.worx /H N95.hwcx /M SIMPLE

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2

BEFORE YOU BEGIN

This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement Tool Software developed by Anite. Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of digital networks. The ed network standards are: cdmaOne 450, 800,1900 MHz CDMA2000 1xEVDO AMPS DVB-H EGPRS GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz GPRS HSDPA HSUPA HSPA+ LTE TD-SCDMA TETRA iDEN UMTS (FDD mode) WiMAX Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. Nemo Outdoor collects measurement results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores them on a hard disk. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization, verification, and maintenance purposes. Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool Nemo Analyze. Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. For a complete list of ed devices, see the Nemo Outdoor product description and data sheet.

Page 13

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.1

Licensing Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install Nemo Outdoor without it. Software-based licenses are not available. A new license type and dongle HW was introduced with Nemo Outdoor 7.5.0. All fielded dongle keys and licenses must be migrated to a new dongle when used with Nemo Outdoor version 7.5.0 or higher. To make the migration easier for our customers, Anite Network Testing has developed a friendly dongle migration tool that is capable of performing the migration. The old dongle key and the new dongle key must be connected to the PC where the migration tool is installed. The tool deactivates the old dongle and activates and s the new one.

♦

The new USB dongle key must be available before updating Nemo Outdoor application to version 7.5.0 or higher. Nemo Outdoor version 7.5.0 or higher is not backwards compatible with the old license dongles.

♦

The computer used for the dongle migration must be connected to the internet.

♦

If the old dongle key contains both Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze licenses, please do not run the migration tool. Instead, [email protected].

♦

Before running the migration tool, please check the TS Expiration date for the old dongle key from the Nemo Outdoor Help menu (About | License Information). If your technical agreement has expired, do not run the migration tool. Migration can be done only with dongle keys that have a valid TS agreement. If your TS agreement has expired, please Anite Network Testing, [email protected]. Before starting the migration process please check what kind of dongle key you are currently using with Nemo Outdoor. If you have the old dongle key shown in Figure 1, please see the instructions in chapter Migration process for old USB dongle keys.

Figure 1.Old dongle key. If you have the new dongle key shown in Figure 2, please see the instructions in chapter Migration process for new USB dongle keys.

Page 14

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Figure 2. New dongle key.

2.1.1 1.

Migration process for old USB dongle keys Anite sends an empty dongle (without a product license) automatically to all customers with a valid TS agreement. The new dongle will be sent to a separately agreed customer address. In case you have not been ed by Anite regarding the dongle migration, please [email protected].

2.

After receiving the empty dongle, and install the migration tool from: •

3.

www.nemo.fi/tools/migrationtool.zip

Extract the migration tool zip-file on the computer that has Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze installed.

4.

Plug in both the old and the new dongle key to the computer where you installed the migration tool. Both dongles MUST be plugged in simultaneously.

♦

Do not unplug the dongle keys during the migration process. This may permanently damage the keys. 5. Run the DriverlessMigrationClient.exe file to start the migration tool.

Page 15

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Figure 3.Migration tool. 6.

Make sure the migration tool identifies both dongles (keys) connected (Time and Time Driverless dongles). They should appear in the Connected keys table.

7.

Click the Migrate License button.

8.

The migration tool reads the license details from the old dongle and sends the details to Anite Network Testing over the internet.

9.

Anite creates a new license with a similar configuration and sends the new license to the migration tool over the internet.

10. The migration tool activates the new dongle and writes the new license details on the dongle. The migration tool also tests that the new dongle works properly. 11. After testing that the new dongle works properly, the migration tool deactivates the old dongle and informs the customer that the migration process was successful and the new dongle with the product license is ready for use. 12. The migration tool can now be uninstalled and the old dongle key can be disposed of.

Page 16

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.1.2 1.

Migration process for new USB dongle keys and install the migration tool from: •

2.

www.nemo.fi/tools/migrationtool.zip

Extract the migration tool zip-file on the computer that has Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze installed.

3.

♦

Plug in the dongle key to the computer where you installed the migration tool.

Do not unplug the dongle key during the migration process. This may permanently damage the key. 4. Run the DriverlessMigrationClient.exe file to start the migration tool.

Figure 4. Migration tool. 5.

Click the Migrate License button.

6.

The migration tool reads the license details from the dongle and sends the details to Anite Network Testing over the internet.

7.

Anite creates a new license with a similar configuration and sends the new license to the migration tool over the internet.

8.

The migration tool writes the new license details on the dongle. The migration tool also tests that the dongle works properly.

9.

After testing that the dongle works properly, the migration tool informs the customer that the migration process was successful and the dongle with the new product license is ready for use.

10. The migration tool can now be uninstalled.

Page 17

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.1.3

Technical expiration The USB dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor include a compulsory technical and maintenance agreement option. The technical expiration date defines the date the agreement ends. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor application. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 7.50 with a 1-year technical maintenance agreement in April 2015. The customer is entitled for free updates until April 2016. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2016 cannot be used with the USB key without renewing the technical & maintenance agreement. After the technical & maintenance agreement is renewed, the key can be updated remotely and the customer can update the application to the latest version.

2.2

Important ♦

Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires rights.

♦

Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability! The Nemo Outdoor must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling behind wireless technologies. The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000, MSM6500, MSM6800, TM6200, TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US, TM7200, and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have not been verified by Anite. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Anite does not guarantee that the terminals will work flawlessly. Please check the Nemo Outdoor product description for a list of measurement terminals verified and approved by Anite. Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobile’s keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo Outdoor system is running. With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. Otherwise, the mobile can dial a wrong number. With Nokia GSM, GPRS, and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be activated. In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct levels. Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document. Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission power of the mobile. After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test mobile into normal use, it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo Outdoor triggered events in the mobile. Use only the supplied connecting cable, included with the Nemo Outdoor, for connecting the Nemo Outdoor test devices to the computer’s USB port. When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use, the battery operation time is reduced from normal use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile manual.

Page 18

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.2.1 Local laws and regulations Note that the local laws and/or regulations may set limitations, restrictions or other obligations on the use of the Nemo Outdoor and/or the test devices. Observe the laws and regulations of the country (as well as of any other relevant jurisdiction) where the Nemo Outdoor and/or test device is used. Anite assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with the local laws and/or regulations.

2.2.2

Nemo Outdoor laptop settings The laptops used for running Nemo Outdoor need to be set up before measurements. Below are described the most important settings that may have an effect on the measurement results.

2.2.2.1 Power options Before you begin using Nemo Outdoor, you need to set the power management options of the laptop to High performance to avoid disruptions in the performance of Nemo Outdoor. Go to Control | System and Security | Power Options. Select the High performance power plan.

2.2.2.2 Active protection system If there is a system that detects acceleration in the laptop and causes the hard disk to stop when jolted, it should be turned off. Otherwise, there may be breaks in measurement data. In voice quality testing there may be missing MOS scores, and with other test devices, gaps in the measurement data. With Lenovo laptops, select Control | System and Security | Lenovo Active Protection. On the Configuration page, deselect the Enable Active Protection System option.

Page 19

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.2.2.3 USB hub properties Also, check the generic USB hub properties. Go to Device Manager, expand the Universal Serial Bus controllers item, right-click the Generic USB Hub item and select Properties. Open the Power Management tab and check that the Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power option is deselected. Repeat this for all the Generic USB Hub items.

2.2.3

Traffic safety Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. , traffic safety comes first. Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time. Please observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. Anite assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation. Always observe the local speed limits and traffic regulations when conducting drive testing.

Page 20

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.2.4

Operating environment Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the Manual, including its warnings, for the devices used by Nemo Outdoor. Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger. Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. It may interfere with nearby electronic devices. Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical plants, or sites where blasting operations are in progress.

Page 21

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW

3.1

Voice testing The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC ( provided or, optionally, provided by Anite with all the software installed). The package also includes the necessary connecting cables, serial or USB port adapters, a GPS receiver, and fast frequency scanners if applicable. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available.

3.2

Circuit-switched data testing The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit (Nemo Outdoor), an application server, and a data server. The data server is used to establish a data connection between the measurement unit and the application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. It is a Linux-based istration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous T/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo Data Test Server s FTP, SFTP, HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/T, Ping, Trace route testing and RTSP (video streaming). CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that circuit-switched data. The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If you are using a FTP server, the measurement unit s (Send mode) or s (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit can only receive files. The can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes, which in turn define the desired transfer rate. During the measurement, the will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters, such as coding scheme and number of timeslots.

3.3

Packet-switched data testing The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit and an application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. It is a Linux-based istration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous T/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo Data Test Server s FTP, SFTP, HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/T, Ping, Trace route testing, and RTSP (video streaming). PS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that packet-switched data. The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If you are using an FTP server, the measurement unit s (Send mode) or s (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit can only receive files.

Page 22

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

During the measurement, the will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of timeslots.

3.4

Nemo Media Router Nemo Media Router (NMR) is Anite’s proprietary communications interface and application developed for Android-based smartphones. With the NMR interface, smartphones communicate with PC-based applications, such as, Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex, enabling voice quality (PESQ/POLQA) measurements and data transfers on smartphones without any additional hardware. When performing voice quality measurements with NMR, the smartphone records the received sample audio files and transfers audio files via the NMR interface to the test computer in real time. The computer calculates the PESQ/POLQA MOS scores and the values are written in the Nemo Outdoor log file. Eight phones can be connected to one U simultaneously. Also data transfers can be made using Nemo Media Router installed on the smartphone. ♦

NMR versions 1.0 and 1.1 are not ed with Nemo Outdoor version 7.3.0.x. Customers using Nemo Media Router 1.0 or 1.1 should not update Nemo Outdoor to the latest version before updating the Nemo Media Router application on the test handsets. Nemo Media Router application and update instructions are available from the Nemo Club http://nemoclub.anite.com.

♦

NMR Voice Quality Testing Option can be fetched from NMR license server automatically for all the currently fielded units by launching the Nemo Media Router 2.00 application on the phone after installation.

3.4.1

Installing Nemo Media Router This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring Nemo Media Router. Handsets ordered with Nemo Media Route come preinstalled from Anite. If you wish to use your existing Nemo Outdoor test terminals, please install the Nemo Media Router first. Please check the Nemo Media Router data sheet for a list of ed devices. Requirements: •

Nemo Handy firmware

1.

Next install the Nemo Media Router on the mobile (if not preinstalled by Anite). Connect the device to your laptop with a USB cable. Copy the NemoMediaRouter.apk file on your device in the Nemo folder.

Page 23

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2. Select Apps | My files on your device and browse to the Nemo folder. Tap the NemoMediaRouter.apk file.

3. Select Install. When the installation is finished, select Open.

Page 24

4.

After the Nemo Media Router application has started, restart the device.

5.

When the device has restarted, connect the device with Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.

When the device is connected with Nemo Outdoor/Invex, the Nemo Media Router application is started automatically. If the Nemo Media Router does not appear, start the application manually, reboot the device, and try again adding the device to Nemo Outdoor.

7. The Outdoor option should be selected as the USB configuration from the bottom of the view.

8.

In the Device Configuration – Port settings page, select Automatic in the Nemo Media Router field and define the correct Trace and Modem ports. Click OK. The device is now ready.

Page 25

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3.4.2

Updating the Nemo Media Router SW and license After installation, existing Nemo Media Router s can fetch software updates and a license overthe-air from the NMR license server by launching the Nemo Media Router application on the phone. In the License Browser view, select the correct license.

Confirm by selecting Load.

After the license has been loaded, the device needs to be restarted. Once the device restarts, you can connect the device to Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Media Router will start automatically.

Page 26

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To check for software updates, make sure that WiFi or mobile data (with HIM devices) is enabled, press the

3.4.3

button at the bottom of the NMR main view and select Check for updates.

TeamViewer Quick When handset isolation modules are used in Nemo Invex II, changing settings and updating the NMR software can be done remotely with TeamViewer Quick without opening the housing. With TeamViewer it is possible to make a remote connection to the test handset via the Nemo Outdoor interface. Please note that one active connection at a time is ed, i.e. connections to several handsets simultaneously are not possible. The laptop running Nemo Outdoor must be connected to the internet, for example, by using a dedicated handset or a USB modem connected to the controlling laptop. The test handset must be in service and data services. Packet data must be enabled. The TeamViewer Quick (QS) application and TeamViewer Remote Control add-on module are preinstalled to all test handsets delivered by Anite Network Testing with the Nemo Invex handset isolation modules. TeamViewer must be installed also to the PC running Nemo Outdoor. These applications can be ed from the Nemo Club.

♦

Please note that TeamViewer can be used free of charge only with non-commercial use. Customers using the UI monitoring and controlling with the TeamViewer tools for commercial use must obtain the licenses directly from TeamViewer (www.teamviewer.com).

Page 27

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To control the NMR device from Nemo Outdoor, right-click the device in the Devices view and select Open Remote Connection.

Nemo Outdoor will connect to the device and open the TeamViewer window with a view of the device screen. You can now control the device.

Page 28

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3.5

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and networks with for up to eight test mobiles/data cards, a scanner and a sound card. In addition, the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls, voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. The system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.

Page 29

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3.6

Nemo Invex II

Nemo Invex II is the most powerful and advanced benchmarking system for testing with large wireless device configurations with high data rates LTE-A Cat 6 and beyond - with rich suite of application testing options. The system enables testing with up to 50 test UEs and with up to three scanners simultaneously with lower power consumption per device, giving operators, network vendors, regulators, and contractors the possibility to benchmark voice and data services on all available wireless technologies in one test drive. In the new Nemo Invex II design, the main focus has been on reliability in extreme conditions. The design boasts sophisticated built-in cooling and heating and replaceable air filters. The enhanced capacity of Nemo Invex II offers for the largest number of test devices in the world. Yet, power efficiency has not been overlooked: the power usage per UIC has been cut in half thanks to the innovative design. The system has improved UPS functions including backup for scanners as well as built-in monitoring for power, temperature, and current maintaining the measurement system at optimal temperature. Furthermore, USB charging 1.2 compliant ports enable the charging of the measurement devices in long measurement sessions. Native SuperSpeed USB 3.0 ports LTE-A Cat 6 test devices and beyond. The one size chassis allows totally free mix and match modularity between the chassis via the advanced Invex Chassis NET communication interface. Compared to current commercial benchmarking systems, the need for manual cabling has been reduced dramatically. The system is designed for easy installation and usage in cars with wireless connectivity to the control PC, built-in ambient lights and KVM (keyboard, video, and mouse) for improved usability – even in environments with less light.

Page 30

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3.7

Indoor measurements Nemo Outdoor has an indoor mode measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be installed on a Tablet PC. Alternatively, a regular laptop can be used as well. As GPS receivers cannot be used indoors, the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. Just click markers along the measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. It is also possible to use BTS files with floorplans. With Nemo Walker, test equipment can be easily taken inside buildings.

Page 31

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

4

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM

This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices. Make sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation. Use the Nemo Outdoor setup program to install Nemo Outdoor; that is, do not just copy the Nemo Outdoor files onto your computer. ♦

Note that for Windows® 7 and Windows® 8, the installation must be run under or other with istrative privileges. Note that if the existing Nemo Outdoor version is 6.2.1.x or older it must be uninstalled via add or remove programs before the Nemo Outdoor 7.x installation can be ran. During Sentinel HASP driver installation, you are prompted to restart the computer. Press “Restart later” to continue with the Nemo Outdoor installation.

4.1

4.2

Hardware and software requirements •

PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows 7 ® Professional (32/64 bit)

•

Processor Intel® Core™ i7 2.66GHz or higher

•

SSD drive recommended

•

100 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use; 4 GB recommended

•

One USB port for copy protection module

•

Ethernet port RJ45

•

Display resolution 1400 x 900 recommended

•

Memory 4GB RAM minimum, 8GB recommended

Other hardware requirements The following hardware is also ed for using Nemo Outdoor. Please note that the scanning receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e.g., from cigarette lighter plug).

Page 32

•

External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted

•

GPS receiver: (optional, following types are ed) o

Garmin GPS II

o

Garmin GPS II Plus

o

Garmin GPS III/III+

o

Garmin GPS 35

o

Garmin V

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

4.3

o

Garmin 18 USB

o

Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit

o

Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output

Nemo Outdoor software is protected with a HASP USB key (see Licensing)

Nemo Outdoor software installation To install or upgrade Nemo Outdoor: ♦

If you have a previous version of Nemo Outdoor installed, please remove it before installation. Go to Control and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Righ-click on Nemo Outdoor and select Uninstall.

♦

Note that installation must be run under or other with istrative privileges. 1.

Select Start | Run in the Windows Status bar. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor\Nemo Outdoor x.xx.xx in the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button. When the Installation program starts, follow the instructions on your screen. We recommend that you select the Complete setup type.

2.

When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete, you will need to restart the computer.

To uninstall Nemo Outdoor: 1.

Go to Control and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Righ-click on Nemo Outdoor and select Uninstall.

♦

Note that uninstallation must be run under or other with istrative privileges.

4.4

Nemo Outdoor device set-up Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. However, instructions for devices that require a data connection can be found in the Device Configuration Guide.

4.4.1

Connecting a GPS receiver 1.

Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer.

2.

Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers.

3.

Start Nemo Outdoor. Open the Configuration Manager, select Device and click the Add button

.

4.

Click on GPS. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next.

5.

Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection.

6.

Page 33

Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

4.4.2

Connecting a scanner See the Nemo Scanner Guide and Nemo FSR1 Manual documents for information on how to connect and start scanners with Nemo Outdoor.

4.4.3

Connecting voice quality devices Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete installation and configuration instructions.

4.5

Nemo Invex device set-up After the Nemo Invex chassis has been set up and configured, you can connect the measurement servers (UIC modules in the Nemo Invex chassis) and devices to Nemo Outdoor. Start Nemo Outdoor with the Nemo Invex license option. Click the Measurement servers

button in the

Devices view. A list of available measurement servers and UICs is displayed. Click Refresh to find all measurement servers connected to the system.

To connect to a measurement server, select the server and click Connect. The State will change to Connected. Repeat this for each measurement server that you want to connect with Nemo Outdoor. Finally, click Close. The Devices view will display all connected measurement servers. The Local item refers to devices connected directly to the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Click the Autodetect button to detect devices connected to the measurement servers.

Page 34

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

A list of devices connected to each measurement server is displayed. Define whether the device will be used for voice quality or data measurements. Read chapter Two data connections on one measurement server for more information on having two active data connections on a single measurement server.

If you are adding a scanner, click the scanner name and select the frequency configuration ed by the scanner.

Page 35

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Finally click Online. The Start Devices dialog opens. Here you can review the UIC and device information. If you are happy with the configuration, click Online or Offline to add the devices to Nemo Outdoor.

You can also restart and reboot the UICs, the OS, and the USB ports or individual UIC modules. Right-click on the UIC and select the command from the context menu.

Page 36

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The Nemo FSR1 scanner needs to be added manually. Click the Add or remove devices button in the Devices view and select Add New Device. In the Add New Device dialog, select the Nemo FSR1 and select a UIC in the field at the bottom of the dialog.

It is possible to save the hardware configuration by selecting File | Save Device Configuration As. This way all the devices can be loaded automatically the next time you start Nemo Outdoor. To disconnect measurement servers, click the Measurement servers button, select a measurement server and click Disconnect.

Page 37

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

4.5.1

Nemo Invex Status view The Nemo Invex Status view displays information about the current Nemo Invex hardware configuration. The image shows the actual configuration and relevant health information for the selected module. If there are more than one chassis, the chassis are numbered and you can arrange the view by dragging and dropping the chassis. The Nemo Invex Status view also displays all possible hardware alerts, such as high/low voltage and battery shutdown. The UIC and HIM module connections are color-coded. If you select a HIM module from the image, the USB port where the HIM module is connected to will be highlighted with the same color.

You can also reset individual USB ports by right-clicking the USB port in the image and selecting the command from the context menu.

Page 38

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The Nemo Invex Systems view displays detailed information about the UICs and the devices. You can disconnect UICs and refresh the view. For HIM modules, the device information is shown.

4.5.2

Two data connections on one measurement server You can have two active data connections on a single measurement server. For example, MMS can be tested with one test device while another device is performing an FTP transfer. The data routing option is enabled by default with Nemo Invex allowing more than one active data connection. However, when routing table modifications is enabled, there are some limitations with data testing. For example, it is required that different source IP addresses for data testing are used. This means that the host IP address or URL must be different for each test device.

Page 39

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Routing table modification should be disabled when only one active data connection is required. Select View | Interface Properties and set Enable routing table modifications for devices to No.

If routing table modification is disabled when performing multi (dual) data testing with one measurement server, problems may be caused when several data connections are opened from one host computer to the terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all data connections are routed via one terminal, not via different terminals and their interfaces. This will distort the test results.

4.6

General guidelines for drive testing Check the condition of all antennas, cables, and connectors: there should be no tight curves, no slashes or cuts. Check that connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or wrong attenuation of field strength. Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from each other. If antennas are too close to each other, it may cause interference.

Page 40

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

λ=c/f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz, λ = 66 cm 900 MHz, λ = 33 cm 1800 MHz, λ = 17 cm

Check the configuration before starting the measurement.

♦

Band (MHz)

λ

450

66 cm (26”)

700

42 cm (18”)

850

35 cm (14”)

900

33 cm (13”)

1800

17 cm (7”)

1900

16 cm (6.3”)

2100

14 cm (5.5”)

2300

13 cm (5.1”)

2500

12 cm (4.7”)

2600

11 cm (4.3”)

GPS (1565- 1575)

19 cm (7.5”)

Individual antennas and the mobile holder antenna couplers may have different performance.

♦

When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna cables. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.

Page 41

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

Check the condition of all RF cables, and connectors: no tight curves, no slashes or cuts.

♦

Check that RF connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or wrong attenuation of signals. Use the SMA torque wrench to tighten the connectors

♦

Minimum distance between antennas, at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from each other

♦

Individual antennas may have different performance. Therefore use only one antenna type with all test devices

♦

When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna cables. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.

♦

Any unused RF connectors in the RF-splitters must be terminated.

♦

RF-splitters shall be used only for test UEs. If RF-splitters are used also with scanners, separate RF-splitters must be used.

♦

Main and MIMO RF cables of the same UE shall not be connected to the same RF-splitter as it would disable the MIMO/diversity.

Page 42

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

After you have installed Nemo Outdoor, you will need to configure the system for your environment before you will be able to use the measurement functions. The following instructions will help you in this initial configuration.

5.1

Configuring Nemo Outdoor You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. For a first-time the most convenient way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. Older s of Nemo Outdoor may want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog, and more advanced s may want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually.

5.1.1

Configuration through Welcome page 1.

The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a firsttime , and also helps more advanced s to add new devices. It appears on the screen when you start Nemo Outdoor. If you do not want to view this window in the future when opening Nemo Outdoor, select the Do not show this again option.

2.

With the Automatic device detection functionality, you can automatically add devices to Nemo Outdoor without needing to manually set up the system. This functionality automatically searches the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM port information.

Page 43

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a USB cable. Furthermore, you may need to select the correct device model from the dropdown menu.

♦

Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. In addition, you may need to configure the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Device Configuration Guide for instructions on how to do this. The device may also require additional configurations in its modem settings. 3.

You can start the devices in online mode by clicking the Start Devices button below, start them in offline mode by clicking the Work Offline button, or refresh the device configuration by clicking the Refresh button on the bottom right-hand corner of the window. This is useful, e.g., when you accidentally unplug a device and plug it in again.

4.

PIN code requests should be turned off for all devices but in case there is a pending PIN code request for a test device, a dialog will be displayed where you can enter the PIN code. After pressing OK, PIN code requesting will be disabled from the device.

Page 44

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5. You can also open a workspace file from the Welcome dialog.

6.

With the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations. This includes the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device. If you would like to start Nemo Outdoor in online mode, select a pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.

Page 45

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

7. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. If you want, you can configure the devices manually and activate them. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Offline button 8.

in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Workspace field you can select a workspace for the measurement. Click Load Selected Files.

Page 46

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.1.2

Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click Other… in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window. 1. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a workspace, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a workspace. If you are a first-time of Nemo Outdoor, go to step 4.

Page 47

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a premade device configuration and a workspace and click Online. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.

3.

If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Online button

4.

in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

In the Load Device Configuration dialog, select Empty Device Configuration and click Start Devices. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears.

5.

Add a device by selecting Measurement | Add New Device or by clicking the Add or remove devices button

in the Devices view. Choose the appropriate phone, scanner,

or GPS receiver from the list and click Next. 6.

All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. Nemo Outdoor application detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly.

7.

A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. Set the appropriate values.

8.

Click on Measurement Properties in the Device Configuration dialog to enter the Measurement Properties dialog. Here you will find device-specific measurement settings. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK.

9.

Double-click the Interface item in the Configuration Manager

(alt+M) to open the

Interface Properties dialog. Here you will find general measurement settings that affect all devices. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. You can now start the measurements.

Page 48

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.1.3

Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements. In addition, you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports. Click the Autodetect Devices button in the toolbar.

A dialog with a list of previously added devices appears. In the Label field you can type a name for the device. Select the devices you want to add, define whether the device is in data mode or voice quality mode, and click the Online or Offline button at the bottom of the dialog.

5.1.4

Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically when devices are connected and started. In the Nemo Outdoor main view, perform the following configurations. 1.

Page 49

Go to View | Interface Properties.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2. On the Measurement page, set the Start recording automatically when devices are started and Start scripts automatically options to Yes.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Save the workspace and hardware configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace As, and File | Save Device Configuration As.

5.

Close Nemo Outdoor. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor, measurements will start automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are selected.

5.2

Configuring test mobiles To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for data testing purposes, see the Device Configuration Guide provided by Anite. PIN Code Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. Please consult the mobile manual to find these options from the mobile. ♦

Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger, if possible, when carrying out measurements.

Page 50

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3

Configuration Manager Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager. You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking the Configuration Manager toolbar button

.

The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. Select an item from the list and click the Properties button

(if applicable) to edit the item.

The System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor. Under Measurement Servers are listed all Nemo Invex measurement servers connected to the system. Select a server to view some hardware status information for the server.

Page 51

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.1

Handler information

Under Handler Information, you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your computer. All the handlers that you have purchased can be found in the Nemo Outdoor product package. Each device has its own handler, and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor, you must have the corresponding handler installed.

5.3.2

interface

Under the Interface item, you will find several items. Double-click on the Interface Properties item to open the Interface Properties dialog.

Page 52

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup. Under Color Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see Interface Properties – Colors). Clicking on Color Sets will display the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For further information on how to create color sets, see chapter Color Set Editor. You can define the format in which various parameter values are presented through the Presentation modes item (see Interface Properties – Presentation). Operators and CDMA Operators displays a list of operator names along with the respective MCC and MNC codes. To add new operators to the list, double-click the Operators or CDMA Operators item in the Configuration Manage and click the Add button.

Enter the Operator name, MCC, and MNC. For CDMA operators, add the operator name and SID.

Page 53

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.2.1 Interface Properties – General

Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be opened the next time you start the SW. Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing. Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the Script Status window when script files are used in measurements. Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in audio quality measurements also during playback. When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window is displayed. Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to exit the Full Screen mode through an UI button. With the Show 'Debug log file management' dialog on exit option selected, a debug file will be generated when Nemo Outdoor is closed. When the Include device number in audio notification option is selected, the device number is included at the beginning of the notification audio alert. With the Load workspace on startup option you can define which workspace is loaded when Nemo Outdoor is started.

Page 54

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

With the Load hardware configuration on startup option you can define which hardware configuration is loaded when Nemo Outdoor is started. With the Start measurement list on startup option you can define which measurement list is loaded and started when Nemo Outdoor is started. When the Enable route history option is selected, a GPX (GPS Exchange Format) file is generated from the measurement. A GPX file is also generated when loading playback files. GPX is a lightweight XML data format for the interchange of GPS data (waypoints, routes, and tracks) between applications and web services on the Internet.

5.3.2.2 Interface Properties – Measurement By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access the Measurement tab in the Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make settings affecting all measurements.

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-monthday hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. You can also create custom filename templates. See chapter Creating Filename Templates.

Page 55

%a

Abbreviated weekday name

%A

Full weekday name

%b

Abbreviated month name

%B

Full month name

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

%d

Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)

%H

Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)

%I

Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)

%j

Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)

%m

Month as decimal number (01 – 12)

%M

Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)

%n

Sequence number (1 – )

%N

Sequence number (1 – )

%p

Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock

%S

Second as decimal number (00 – 59)

%U

Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53)

%w

Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)

%W

Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53)

%y

Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)

%Y

Year with century, as decimal number

%z

Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z

Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the script file when you click the Start Recording button

in the main window.

With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile to return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the mobile will stay in the current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile in active state when toggling a script on and off. ♦

Please note that it is recommended that with LTE devices this option is set to No. If attach/ detach commands are needed frequently, for example, with script files it is suggested that radio off/radio on commands are used instead of attach/detach. Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop recording after the script is finished. If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the Synchronize script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices are finished before repeating the scripts. Select the Prevent script stopping during connection establishment option to delay the script stopping if any of the devices has a call or connection attempt ongoing. With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of the measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time. Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start measuring only after there is a GPS fix.

Page 56

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Select the Enable automatic measurement pausing option to initiate an automatic pause when GPS velocity goes under X km/h for X seconds or the GPS position is stale (ie. coordinates do not change). Logging will be resumed automatically after the GPS velocity exceeds the -specified limit X. GPS time offset value specifies the difference between GPS UTC time and local time. This offset is used by handlers when GPS time synchronization is performed. Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed. Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions from the device when the device is started. When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Outdoor uses the ETSI specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call. Enable ETSI call timeout option changes the call attempt timeout to terminate at CAC 2 event. By default, call attempt timeout terminates at CAC 1 event. See the Nemo File Format specification (Help | Nemo File Format) for more information on the events. With the Enable routing table modifications for local devices option s can enable and disable routing table modification. The option is selected by default. Routing table modification should be disabled only with single data testing. If routing table modification is disabled with multi data testing, it can cause problems when several data connections are opened from one host computer to terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all connections are routed via one terminal, not via different terminals and their interfaces. This distorts the test results. Buffer size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the interface. The size of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement. Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline mode to online mode. Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test calls after the measurement is ended. Selecting the Show FTP send dialog before sending measurement to server option will display the Send Measurement to FTP Server dialog after the measurement is ended and before the log files are sent to an FTP server. See chapter ing measurement files to server for more information. Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message when the measurement has been paused. With the Show ‘Stop Recording Query’ dialog before recording is stopped option selected, a dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording.

Page 57

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

When the Show ‘Enable Missing Neighbor Query’ dialog when recording is started option is selected, a notification dialog will appear reminding you to enable missing neighbor detection when a scanner and a test terminal are connected to Nemo Outdoor and missing neighbor detection is not currently enabled. If you agree to enable the missing neighbor detection functionality through the dialog, the Missing Neighbor Detection dialog will appear. However, note that you are not able to enable the missing neighbor functionality if active measurement properties do not missing neighbor detection. In that case recording must be stopped and measurement properties changed before the missing neighbor functionality can be enabled. Selecting the Start recording when incoming call is received option enables Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically when a test call is received. Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are deleted. •

measurement files (.nmf)

•

binary files (.nbl)

•

packet capture files (.pcap)

•

marker files (.mrk)

•

indoor map files (.tab and image)

RF offset. In order to prevent measurements with missing/incorrect RF antenna connections, Nemo Outdoor performs a check when measurement is started. The RXL/RSSI value of each measured channel/carrier is read from each phone and scanner. The value from each channel is compared to the highest value from all devices. If the measured value is less than X dB (=RF offset value) below the highest value, a warning message is displayed to the with the channel number and the device name(s). Select the Include packet capture logs in measurement file option to send packet capture logs during measurement file .

5.3.2.3 Creating filename templates You can create templates for naming measurement log files. The template includes parameters (tags) and a list of allowed values for each parameter. The template also specifies the filename format which defines how the tags are used in the filename. The templates can be exported and imported. Double-click the Filename item on the Interface Properties – Measurement page to open the Filename Editor. Click the Add button to add a custom parameter.

Page 58

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the Parameter Editor dialog, type a name for the new parameter. Then click the New button to add the possible values for the parameter. For example, add a parameter called city and then add a list of cities where you conduct measurements. Finally click OK to return to the Filename Editor.

The new parameter is listed in the Parameters table. You can add as many parameters as needed. In the Filename field, define the filename format where you can now use your custom parameters. Below the Filename field you can see what the filename will look like with the selected parameters.

Page 59

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

When you start logging, you will be asked to select a value for the custom parameter. This value will be used in the filename.

Page 60

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.2.4 Interface Properties – Paths

In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see the default values. To change the default paths, click on the … button and browse for a new location. In the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A World.tab map file is provided by Anite in the installation package. Local Files refers to the files that are used in FTP testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. Default Color Set refers to the color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions on making new color sets, see chapter Color Set Editor. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications In the Sounds field, select C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds. ♦

Page 61

Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.2.5 Interface Properties – Presentation

In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are presented. For example, to change the file size and buffer size unit in all data transfer configuration dialogs, edit the Size setting in the Interface Properties – Presentation dialog.

Page 62

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.2.6 Interface Properties – Colors

In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The first eight colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map routes. To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all the colors. To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.

Page 63

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.3

Notifications

Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo Outdoor includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications. The notifications come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or values in the measurement file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or display a .png image in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. A textual notification is displayed in the Output window by default. By double-clicking a notification, the Notifications window appears. There you can make changes to, for example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.

Page 64

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.3.1 Notification Configuration To make your own notifications, select the Notifications item in the Configuration Manager window and double-click any notification to open the Notifications dialog. Alternatively select View | Notification Manager. The dialog displays all existing notifications. From the table you can see the notification title and the selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list.

Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Browse a sound file in the field or use the default file. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. In the Interface Properties – Paths dialog, define which one you would like to use. Use the Play button to listen to the file. If you want to attach your own sound files (.wav) to the notifications, you should create the sound files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female. Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. Browse a bitmap file in the field or use the default file. The button will display a preview of the selected image. If you want to attach your own bitmaps to the notifications, you should create the files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Images.

Page 65

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog.

Title defines a name for the notification. Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification. You can define a counter that specifies how many times the notification rules must match consecutively before the notification is triggered. Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about certain events only once. Select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Then define the Condition and Value for the selected parameter and click Add to list to add the new criteria for the notification. You can add several criteria for each notification. Finally click OK and the notification is saved and added in the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap files to the notification. The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you can activate the notification for a specific device. Click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view to open the dialog.

Page 66

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To activate a notification for a particular device, click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view. This will open the Measurement Properties, Notifications dialog. Select the notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK.

The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device. Select the notification from the list and select how you would like to be notified. The Notification Properties button will open the Notification Configuration dialog where you can edit the notification settings (see chapter Notification Configuration for more information). By clicking the Select All and Clear All buttons, you can select and clear all items in the list.

To make -configurable notifications: 1.

Open the Notifications dialog (View | Notification Manager) and click Add.

2.

In the Notification Criteria dialog, define the notification criteria and click OK.

3.

In the Notifications dialog, select the notification that you just created. Define sound and bitmap files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the notifications table.

4.

Page 67

Click OK to save the settings.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.4

♦

Scripts

Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners. Under the Scripts item you will find premade scripts and -defined scripts. Scripts can be used to perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data transfers. Select the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view. Double-click on any of these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device script settings button in the Devices view. Creating Script files is described in more detail in chapter Making script files.

Page 68

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.5

Base station files

Under the Base Station Files item you will find loaded base station files. Select a BTS file to view the BTS information in the Configuration Manager view. Click the – button to remove the BTS file.

5.3.6

Page 69

Device configurations

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Under Device Configurations, you will find a list of device configuration files (.hwc). A device configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. You can use the device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having to detect and configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor. You can load a .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. Alternatively, you can load a device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device Configuration dialog. To make new device configurations, add devices manually in Nemo Outdoor and configure them. When everything is ready, select File | Save Device Configuration As and type a name for the saved file. The new .hwc file will appear in the Configuration Manager, Device Configurations folder. To rename a device configuration, double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager and type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog.

5.3.7

Devices

Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor. Note that you can add a new device from the plus icon and clicking on the minus icon

, and remove a device by selecting the device

. The table on the right displays information about the selected

device. Each device (mobile, GPS, and scanner) has its own configuration dialog. Double-clicking on the device will open the applicable device configuration dialog. These dialogs are presented next.

Page 70

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.3.7.1 Device configuration for mobiles and modems

The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone, and makes it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also stored in the log file header. Trace port and Modem port selections are device-specific. Please refer to the Device Configuration Guide for more detailed information. Kodiak PTT port defines the COM port for a Kodiak PTT device. Please refer to chapter Kodiak Push-to-Talk for more information. Nemo Media Router option is used to enable Nemo Media Router. Select Automatic to enable the option. CS data connection option gives a list of all the circuit-switched data connections that have been configured on your computer. If you are making CS data measurements, select a connection here. See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Anite for detailed instructions for configuring test devices. PS data connection option gives a list of all the packet-switched data connections that have been configured on your computer. If you are making PS data measurements, select a connection here. See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Anite for detailed instructions for configuring test devices. Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.

Page 71

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Antenna type

Frequency range

Antenna gain (dBd)

Impedance

VSWR 1

Max power

Polarization

Cable loss

Cable & connector

1140.27

824– 894/1710– 1880/

0 dBd

50 ohm

2:1 @ specified freq.

10 W

Linear vertical

-0.55/ -0.82 dB/m

Mini Low Loss 2.5 m, SMA male

0 dBd

50 ohm

2:1 @ specified freq.

10 W

Linear vertical

1850–2170 MHz 1140.26

890– 960/1850– 1990/ 1710–2170 MHz

Mini Low Loss 2.5 m, SMA male

Product Code

Antenna Model

Frequency Band

Antenna Gain [dBi]

Device

42101-06

MPLV1700

1700- 2700 MHz

4 dBi

PCTEL R&S

421010-04

PCTEL MLPV OP178H

698-2300 MHz

PCTEL R&S

421010-05

421010-07*

421010-08

Mobile Mark Mag.

694-894 MHz

MGRM-WLF-1C10

& 1700- 2700 MHz

3 dBi

Nemo FSR1

Mobile Mark Mag.

750-1250 MHz

MGRM-UMB-1C

3 dBi on 750-1250 MHz, 5 dBi on 16502700 MHz

Nemo FSR1

& 1650-2700 MHz

PCTEL OP178H

698-3000 MHz

3 dBi

PCTEL/ Nemo FSR1

Test UEs

Test UEs 421022-25

PCTEL OP278H

698-3800 MHz

~1 dBi on 900-2100 MHz

PCTEL/ Nemo FSR1

0dBi on 2300 MHz

Test UEs

~1dbi on 2600 MHz ~1.5dBi on 3500 MHz

Page 72

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite or Smarteq. If you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer.

Voice quality algorithm defines which voice quality algorithms are used in voice quality measurements. If you select the Invex isolation module option, you can also make echo measurements. Select the Enable echo measurement option to start logging the echo-related parameters. With the Advanced echo OEM library provided by Opticom it is possible to measure echo from audio with both PESQ and POLQA algorithms. Echo measurements require an additional license and it is available with Nemo Invex using a handset isolation module. Echo measurements are not ed with commercial sound cards, such as, Terratec DMX6 Fire or Maya44. Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality measurements. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the dropdown menu. Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality measurements. Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu. Select the Invex isolation module option to use a terminal with an Invex isolation module for voice quality measurements. Select the VoIP only option to make voice quality measurements (POLQA) over a VoIP connection. If you select this option make the appropriate settings in the VoIP Call Configuration dialog (see VoIP calls).

Page 73

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements. Video quality algorithm defines which algorithms are used in video streaming quality measurements. For more information, see chapter Streaming video quality testing. After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. To exit the dialog, click OK. Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings. You can also enter the Measurement Properties dialog through Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties in the menu bar.

5.3.7.2 Device configuration for scanners

In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device, for example, a name or a usage purpose, making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also stored in the log file header. Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected. Baud rate refers to the communication speed.

Page 74

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank. Antenna type

Frequency range

Antenna gain (dBd)

Impedance

VSWR 1

Max power

Polarization

Cable loss

Cable & connector

1140.27

824– 894/1710– 1880/

0 dBd

50 ohm

2:1 @ specifie d freq.

10 W

Linear vertical

-0.55/ -0.82 dB/m

Mini Low Loss 2.5 m, SMA male

0 dBd

50 ohm

2:1 @ specifie d freq.

10 W

Linear vertical

1850–2170 MHz 1140.26

890– 960/1850– 1990/ 1710–2170 MHz

Mini Low Loss 2.5 m, SMA male

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite or Smarteq. If you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer. Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings (see Measurement Properties). After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

5.3.7.3 Device configuration for GPS receivers

In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device, for example, a name or a usage purpose, making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also stored in the log file header.

Page 75

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Serial port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected. Baud rate refers to the communication speed. The available values are 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600. Data bits, Parity and Stop bits are other communication-related parameters. The available values for Data bits are 5, 6, 7, and 8, the options for Parity are Even, None, and Odd. The default value for Stop bits is 1. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. Check your GPS receiver documentation. After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

5.3.8

View groups

Under the View Groups item are listed all the view groups that are currently loaded. View groups are sets of windows that are open at the same time. You can add a new view group from the plus icon

, and remove a view group by selecting the item and clicking on the minus icon

. When you

select a view group in the Configuration Manager, the right-hand displays the views that are saved in the view group. You can define properties for each view by double-clicking the view name. See chapter View groups for more information on using the view groups.

5.4

Measurement Properties dialog The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the device type (mobile or scanner), on the device model, and on the technologies ed by the device.

Page 76

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.4.1

Measurement Properties – General

Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that Nemo Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile. Note that you should enter the name yourself, as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. The network name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you have been monitoring. BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map. If you have a GPS receiver connected to the system, you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be drawn from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. Click the … button to browse for a BTS file (.nbf or .csv). Cell whitelist file is a feature needed in emergency call testing. It specifies a list of cells from which emergency call testing is possible. Subscriber number can be entered manually in case the information cannot be read from the device with AT-commands.

Page 77

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.4.2

Measurement Properties – Measurement On the Measurement Properties – Measurement page you can define various measurement-related settings. For example, you can define what services will be tested, which data protocols are used, and whether layer messages are logged or not. Note that the selection is device-specific.

5.4.2.1 Services Voice Call opens the Voice Call dialog. DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a voice call. Short Messaging Service. See chapter SMS testing for more information. USSD Message button opens the USSD Testing dialog. See chapter USSD testing for more information on USSD testing. Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings, MMS dialog. See chapter MMS testing for more information on MMS testing. Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog. Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. See chapter Making video calls for more information. Packet Session opens the Packet session settings dialog. ed Data Protocols opens a list of available data protocols. Clicking the field of a data protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol. SIP Server option opens the SIP server dialog. See chapter VoIP calls for more information. VoIP Call option opens the VoIP call dialog. See chapter VoIP calls for more information.

Page 78

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Custom AT Commands offers the possibility to run custom AT commands with certain test terminals. The available commands are device-specific. Type in the AT command and click Send Command. The AT commands and responses are saved in the measurement file.

Incoming call option opens the Incoming Call Configuration dialog. See chapter Receive call for more information.

5.4.2.2 Measurement options Under Measurement Options you can enable and disable various measurement options such as layer messages. If you disable some of the options, the disabled messages will not be recorded in the measurement file. This will decrease output file size. The selection depends on the measurement device used. The parameters in the Measurement Options list vary depending on the device. These options are also accessible through the Devices view.

When the EVRC MOS compensation option is enabled, the Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) tool is biased against the Enhanced Variable Rate Codec (EVRC) used in CDMA networks and other codecs in this family (EVRC-B and EVRC-WB). MOS value is incremented by 0.318MOS. Incoming call mode defines how incoming calls are handled. The options are answer, reject, and ignore. You can also define a delay (in seconds) when the Answer option is selected.

Page 79

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

With Qualcomm-based terminals there are several different Voice call methods. Voice call method is device specific. Trace interface 2 method should be used with MultiRAB testing. When a voice call is terminated, the PS data connection might be released with UEs using the Trace interface call method to make voice calls. In such a case, it is recommended to use the Trace interface 2 call method. Please check the Device Configuration Guide or release note for device-specific information. With Qualcomm-based terminals there is a number of different Video call methods and the correct method must be selected to be able to make video call testing. With the Select AMR codecs option, you can force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For example, when a UE is forced to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps.

♦

Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data connections 384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement terminal.

♦

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

5.4.2.3 Measurement settings With the Force detach when entering idle mode option selected, a GPRS detach is forced when the measurement device enters idle mode. Enable diagnostic data logging option enables/disables Qualcomm raw packet logging. When diagnostics data logging is enabled, you can select individual Qualcomm trace messages to be stored in a separate binary file (.NBL). Both NBL and NMF files can be opened and played back with Nemo Outdoor and Qualcomm raw data messages can be fully decoced in the grid view for further analysis. This functionality requires the Diagnostics Data Logging option OD0700-00.

Page 80

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

Due to a high sample rate, the diagnostic data logging option should not be activated during a normal drive test.

Currently, the following diagnostic messages are available:

Page 81

•

DCI Information report

•

DL Transport block

•

LL1 PUSCH Tx Report

•

LTE MAC UL Transport block

•

MAC UL transport block

•

MAC UL Tx stat

•

PD UL stat

•

PUCCH TX report

•

RLC DL ALL PDU

•

LTE ML1 random access request (MSG1) report

•

LTE ML1 random access response (MSG2) report

•

LTE ML1 UE identification message (MSG3) report

•

LTE ML1 contention resolution message (MSG4) report

•

LTE RLC DL AM All PDU

•

LTE RLC UL AM All PDU

•

LTE ML1 PDCCH-PHICH indication report

•

LTE ML1 uplink packet build indication

•

LTE ML1 PDSCH stat indication

•

LTE LL1 PUCCH CSF Log

•

LTE LL1 PUSCH CSF log

•

LTE LL1 PDSCH decoding results

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.4.3 ♦

Measurement Properties – Frequency scanning with mobiles Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal s frequency scanning.

Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the mobile. The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM. With Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band, e.g. for EGSM, GSM900 and GSM1800. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a grid view.

Page 82

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection, click the Select Channels button to define the channels to be scanned.

Select the Show channels as frequencies option to view the channels in MHz. In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the Available view. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu, channels from all bands will be viewed. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning, click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. If all bands are selected, you have the possibility to select Remove All | ... items from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | ...items from current band.

Page 83

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

If you select the Top-N option, click the Top-N Configuration button to select channels.

In the Top-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which the Top-N channels are recorded. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the Top-N field. The maximum number of Top-N channels is 32. You can click on the Clear all button to clear the table.

Page 84

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.4.4 ♦

Measurement Properties – Pilot scanning with mobiles Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal s pilot scanning.

The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile. Select a value for the ICH RS threshold field. The device will only report cells with ICH RS above the set value. The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. With TopN scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a grid view. Click the Top-N Configuration button to enter the Select Channels dialog.

5.4.5

Measurement Properties – Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning with scanners Please refer to the separate scanner guides, Nemo FSR1 Manual and Nemo Scanner Guide, included in the product package.

Page 85

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.4.6

Measurement Properties - Script In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device Settings button

in

the Devices window and select Script Properties.

In the Script File field, browse the script file that you want to use. There are some premade script files available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see chapter Making script files). With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. The scripts in the same group are synchronized with each other. Devices can be assigned for certain script groups. By default the script group is selected as , but the can also create new script groups by selecting in the Script group drop-down menu, and typing the name of the new script group in the field. A script group can be also saved with a specific name. To be able to use script groups, the Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the Interface Properties (see Interface Properties – Measurement). When a script group is selected as , but Synchronize script repeats option is selected, all script files that belong to the same group are synchronized. Script groups can be used, e.g., with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice quality terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. For example, script files used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group, and their script files are synchronized with one another, whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second script group. The script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each device.

Page 86

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6

DURING MEASUREMENTS

When Nemo Outdoor is performing the defined test measurement, you can view the process in a number of graphs, grids, and maps. The graph and grid windows are fully configurable. In the following chapters, the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some examples are given to illustrate their use. If you have any problems in starting the measurements, see chapter Troubleshooting.

6.1

Textual notes It is possible to add textual notes at points of interest during measurements. Click the Add Textual Note button in the toolbar. Note that you need to start recording before the button is activated.

Page 87

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

You can either type the note in the field or select a predefined text and click OK. To save new predefined notes, type in the text, click the arrow next to the OK button and select Add predefined text. Next time the text will be available in the drop-down menu at the top. The textual notes can be viewed during playback, for example, in an events grid.

6.2

Nemo Commander remote control option for Nemo Outdoor/ Invex Nemo Outdoor measurement units can be remotely configured and controlled with Nemo Commander. This requires the Remote option in Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex and the Nemo Commander SW. All the same interface functionalities are available in remote mode as in normal mode. For more information on the Nemo Commander SW, please refer to the Nemo Commander manual. In order to use TeamViewer for controlling the Nemo Outdoor units, the TeamViewer application must be installed on the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Please refer to the Nemo Commander manual for more information. To configure the Remote mode, select Remote | Settings. ♦

Note that if the Remote menu does not appear in the menu bar, your Nemo Outdoor license does not have the Remote option (product code OD0700-01).

On the Interface Properties – Remote page, select Yes for Enable remote mode. When Remote mode is enabled, Nemo Outdoor will automatically perform a maintenance session at startup. Also the manual Maintenance tool is activated in the Remote menu.

Page 88

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Define the Driver name and Driver phone number (optional).

6.2.1

Nemo Commander server options FTP protocol is used to transfer data between field units and Nemo Commander. Commander Server options define the server (FTP) address, name, and .

Page 89

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Add the FTP server host name or IP address. ♦

Leave name, Remote folder, and fields empty. This information is generated by the system and the fields are updated after the initial maintenance session. Use secure protocol: Select in case SFTP protocols is used in the server Use ive mode: With ive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection

6.2.2

Initial field unit configuration 1.

Build the Nemo Outdoor HW configuration, in other words, connect the measurement devices (phones, USB modems, and scanners) to the Nemo Outdoor laptop.

2.

A dedicated PS data connection (e.g. 3G/4G USB modem or smartphone, active only during maintenance sessions) is required to establish the connection between Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Commander. Connect the device to the Nemo Outdoor laptop and install the necessary drivers. Do not add the device to Nemo Outdoor as it will not be used as a measurement device.

3.

Synchronize date and time settings between the Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Commander computers.

4.

Enable the Remote mode on the Nemo Outdoor Interface Properties – Remote page and define the Commander Server settings.

♦

6.2.3

Page 90

5.

Select Maintenance from the Remote menu.

•

The Nemo Outdoor unit connects and s to Nemo Commander.

•

The HW configuration of the Nemo Outdoor unit is ed to Nemo Commander.

Step 5, Maintenance, must be repeated every time the HW configuration changes.

Measurement workflow 1.

Nemo Commander: Define measurement sessions for the field unit(s)

•

Scripts for each device

•

Session start/stop time

2.

Nemo Outdoor: Power on laptop and all test devices

•

Nemo Outdoor starts automatically

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.2.4

•

Status report is ed to Nemo Commander

•

Measurement session is ed from Nemo Commander

•

Measurements are started automatically according to the ed configuration

•

Periodic status reports are sent to Nemo Commander (configured in Nemo Commander)

3.

Nemo Commander: the HW configuration from latest status report (optional)

•

If incorrect, driver

4.

Nemo Outdoor: End measurements

•

Measurements are stopped at the scheduled time

•

Log files and status reports are ed to Nemo Commander

Events reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander The following measurement events are reported by Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander. Status events: •

Start measurement

•

Stop measurement

•

GSP fix lost

•

GSP fix acquired

•

Device responding

•

Device power off request

•

Device restart

•

High voltage shutdown

•

Battery operation

•

Battery shutdown

Errors: •

Start measurement failed

•

Device not responding

Warnings:

Page 91

•

Low voltage

•

High voltage

•

Battery voltage low

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.3

Making scanning measurements

6.3.1

With a scanner In order to measure with a scanner, just start the recording by clicking the Start Recording button. Nemo Outdoor will start writing the measurement data in a file.

6.3.2

With a mobile To carry out frequency scanning with a mobile phone, first make sure that the terminal model s the scanning feature. To do frequency scanning, select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning, or Measurement control | Start Continuous Scanning.

To end a scanning measurement, select Measurement control | Stop Scanning.

6.4

Making voice calls To make voice calls: 1.

In the Measurement Properties, Measurement page (see Measurement Properties – Measurement), insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Voice Call field. Click OK.

2.

Select Start Voice Call from the Device Commands menu

or from the Measurement

menu. Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts ♦

button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. 3.

When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Voice Call from the Device Commands menu

Page 92

. If you are running a script, wait until the script is finished.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.4.1

Voice Call Configuration Voice call settings are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality measurements. Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog and the Voice Call Configuration dialog will be opened.

Phone number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number must be such that the line stays open for a -defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. Fixed: The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. Random: In addition to a fixed call duration, you can specify a random call duration by specifying the minimum and maximum values in seconds. The call duration will be randomly selected between the specified values during measurements. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later.

Page 93

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

When Wait for call connection option is selected, a call script will move on to the next command after receiving the CAA event after a voice call has been made. When the option is not selected, the script will move on to the next command after a traffic channel is allocated (CAC1 event is received). Select the Enable end-to-end call option to activate voice call synchronization between two devices connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system or between a device and Nemo Server. Select the Nemo Server option to enable voice call synchronization between a device and Nemo Server. Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define connection settings. Select the Local device options to activate end-to-end voice calls between two devices connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system. Own number defines the A-party phone number. Call reception timeout defines the max. time to receive the incoming call. If call is not received within the timeout, call attempt failure with the cause “Incoming call not received” is written to the log file. Select the Enable voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license s voice quality measurements. Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples: 10s.wav, 4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files. Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the -defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved. ♦

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. See chapter Making script files for more information on making scripts.

♦

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds. CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.

Page 94

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.4.1.1 Configuring manual end-to-end voice calls With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to make end-to-end voice call testing between two devices connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system. 1.

Add two phones to Nemo Outdoor: Device A and Device B

2.

Open the Voice Call Properties for Device A by double-clicking the Voice Call item in the Devices view.

Page 95

3.

Enter Device B phone number in the Number field.

4.

Select the Enable end-to-end call option.

5.

Select the Local device option and select Device B from the list. Click OK.

6.

You can now start making voice calls from Device A to Device B.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.4.1.2 HTTPS Options dia the HTTPS Options dialog you can define the connection settings for the Nemo Server.

Define the server address, auto (name), and and the name of the Remote folder, i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server. Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol. Select the Use ive mode option to send the measurement files using ive mode. When the Move local files to “Sent” folder after option is selected, the measurement files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer. You can also change this default destination in Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements. The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a -selected data connection, or using mobile broadband. When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, name and fields will become active.

Page 96

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.4.2 ♦

Voice Call Properties – TETRA Note that the TETRA tab is visible only if you are measuring with a TETRA mobile. Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls. Click the Voice Number Properties button in the Measurement Properties dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened.

Number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number must be such that the line stays open for a -defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. Call type defines what kind of calls will be made. There are five different options in TETRA networks: duplex, semiduplex, group, direct, and PSTN. •

Duplex: Normal call between two terminals; both parties can speak at the same time

•

Semiduplex: Call between two terminals, but only one party can speak at a time by pressing the PTT (Press-to-Talk) button

•

Group: Call from one terminal to a group; all terminals having that group active can listen, and by pressing the PTT button, also speak

•

Page 97

Direct: Call between terminals which byes the network, by means of the PTT button

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

• ♦

PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. See chapter Making script files for more information on making scripts. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

6.4.3

Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing Nemo Outdoor s QChat (developed by Qualcomm) and Kodiak Push-to-Talk (PTT) technologies. QChat Push-to-Talk (PTT) calls must be performed using the keypad of the phone when used with Nemo Outdoor. Kodiak PTT calls can be made using UI commands in Nemo Outdoor. Normal call events and statistics are written when attempting or ending PTT calls. Different states of PTT calls, such as idle, getting ready to receive, receiving, transmitting are written to VCHI event. Please see the file format specification for further information. RTP packets are recorded and decoded with Nemo Outdoor. Qchat and Kodiak PTT are optional features in Nemo Outdoor and require a license option.

Page 98

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.4.3.1 Kodiak Push-to-Talk Kodiak PTT devices are connected with Nemo Outdoor as Bluetooth devices. After the device has been paired with the laptop, check the COM port number from the Windows Bluetooth Devices dialog. Start Nemo Outdoor and add the device (Add New Device | Phone | Qualcomm). In the Device Configuration dialog, select the COM port assigned for your device in the Kodiak PTT port field and click OK.

In the Measurement Properties – Measurement page, double-click the Kodiak PTT call item to open the Kodiak Call Configuration dialog.

Call type defines what kind of call will be made. The options are one to one, one to many, and group call.

Page 99

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Recipients defines to whom the call is made. The recipients are selected from the list of the Kodiak application and are defined as index numbers. For example, if you would like to make a call to the first on the list, enter 0. If the selected call type is one to many, define several recipients and separate the index numbers with semicolons. If the selected call type is group call, select the recipient from the group list of the Kodiak application and again, use the index number. After the call type and recipients have been defined, select Kodiak Server to to the Kodiak server.

After you have ed to the Kodiak server you can start a Kodiak call.

Once the Kodiak call has been established, select Press PTT Button/Release PTT Button.

Page 100

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

From Events grids, you can observe the Kodiak call events.

In addition to calls, you can send IPAs. Go to Measurement Properties – Measurement and doubleclick the Instant Personal Alert item. Define the recipient (only one at a time) and click Send Message.

6.5

Voice quality measurements Nemo Outdoor s mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements. Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete instructions on setting up and making voice quality measurements.

Page 101

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.6

Making video calls Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog to access the Video Call Properties dialog. These settings are needed for making video calls. ♦

Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.94 VoLTE option is required for video over LTE testing.

Number defines the number where the video call will be made. When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later. Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license s voice quality measurements. Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. With the Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.

Page 102

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the -defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved. ♦

Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. See chapter Making script files for more information on making scripts.

♦

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server, the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds. CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

♦

Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings to be made prior to making the call. Go to Measurement Properties | Measurement, and select the applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu. Select the method based on the list below, or try each Method separately and select the one that works. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file. •

Method 1 - Samsung Z105

•

Method 2 - Samsung Z107

•

Method 3 - Samsung Z140, Samsung Z500, Samsung P920, Samsung Z560, Samsung ZX20

•

Method 4 - Samsung ZV10

•

Method 5 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile

•

Method 6 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile

•

Method 7 - LG KU950 , LG KF700

•

Method 8 - Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal keypad)

Page 103

•

Method 9 - Samsung G800

•

Method 10 - Not used

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To make video calls: 1.

In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Video Number field. Click OK.

2.

Select Make Video Call from the Device Commands menu

or from the Measurement

menu. Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts ♦

button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. 3.

When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Video Call. If you are running a script, wait until the script is finished.

♦

Note! Video call testing is ed on any video call – capable terminal based on Qualcomm chipset. However, the must to select the correct method from Measurement Properties | Measurement prior to making the call. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file.

♦

Terminals verified by Anite Network Testing video calls. However, video call testing with Android-based devices is not ed.

6.7

Data transfers With mobiles ing CS and PS data, you can make data transfers. In Nemo Outdoor, you have several data protocol options for making data transfers. The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. Each data transfer needs to be set up and configured individually. Multiple concurrent data transfers can be made manually or with scripts. To make multiple concurrent data transfers manually, go in online mode and activate a packet session. Then select Start New Data Transfer and the desired protocol.

Page 104

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding function (Measurement Properties - Measurement) prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

6.7.1 ♦

Configuring the data connection Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection that is used for the transfer. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers. If you are making CS data transfers, see chapter Data Call Properties. If you are making PS data transfers, see chapter Packet Session Settings.

6.7.1.1 Data Call Properties dialog Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. Open the Data Call Properties dialog by double-clicking the Circuit-Switched Data Call item in the Devices view. There are separate views for GSM, UMTS, and CDMA. The parameters are the same. The UMTS and CDMA views just have fewer parameters. ♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

Number defines the number of the server. name refers to the server name. refers to the server . Transparent mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data call. Compression defines if no compression or v.42bis compression is used.

Page 105

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Modem type refers to the modem type that the server is using. The alternatives are Analog (v.34) and ISDN (v.110 and v.120). Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction. Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface. Enable automatic link adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link Adaptation (ALA). The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best channel coding.

6.7.1.2 Packet session settings Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. Double-click the Packet Session item in the Devices view to access the Packet Session Settings dialog.

Page 106

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. the operator of the network that you are measuring.

6.7.1.3 T/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf) ♦

Note that it is required that Nemo Server is used with Iperf testing as the original Iperf service is slightly modified for optimal performance. Open the T/UDP Protocol Configuration dialogs by double-clicking the T (IPerf) and UDP (IPerf) items in the Devices view.

Page 107

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each connection must have its own IP address.

♦

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used.

♦

Note that Firewall should be turned off. Host port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For T and UDP protocols, the default port is 5001. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Listen port refers to the port used by the client. For T and UDP protocols, the default port is 6015. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data, or both. Transfer timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. If the transfer attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection, the data connection attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of Transfer timeout values is from 0 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. T window size defines the size of the receive window during T/IP transmission. If it is too small, it can decrease the maximum data throughput, and if it is too high it can increase the retransmission round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput, the window size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example, with HSDPA with category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms. To avoid reduction of the throughput the T window size should be set at least to 7.3 Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB. Downlink testing (these values are indicative only):

Page 108

Max. throughput

~RTT (ms)

T window size (kbit)

T window size (kB)

64 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE)

600

38.4

4.8

128 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE)

600

76.8

9.6

256 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE)

600

153.6

19.2

384kbps (Rel. 99)

200

76.8

9.6

HSDPA 1.8Mbps UE category 3 & 4

100

180

22.5

HSDPA 3.6Mbps UE category 5 & 6

100

360

45

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Max. throughput

~RTT (ms)

T window size (kbit)

T window size (kB)

HSDPA 7.3Mbps UE category 7 & 8

100

730

91.25

HSDPA 10.2Mbps UE category 9

100

1020

127.5

HSDPA 14.4Mbps UE category 9

100

1440

180

T buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes. UDP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes. UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. Since UDP does not guarantee successful data transmission, it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower layers. If higher data transmission rate is used, the packet error rate (PER) increases. For example, if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to 400kbit/s, there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to transmit successfully). Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it limits the maximum throughput that is not normally desired. UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. It should be smaller than the maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower layers. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it should be avoided. On the other hand if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the UDP and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted data with the result of smaller data throughput. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit less than maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1,500 bytes. A good default value for the UDP datagram size is 1,460 bytes. Number of threads defines the number of parallel Iperf data transfers. Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds. Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes; that is, the transfer finishes when the defined amount of data has been transferred. The size of the individual data packages is defined in the Packet Size field. ♦

Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties dialog, the Transfer duration option will be disabled. This is because when the Transfer data size option is used, the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has been transferred. It is not limited by time. Next, click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. Click the PDP Context Properties button.

Page 109

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.7.2

Configuring the FTP protocol Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. The server can be any standard FTP server. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The FTP module s firewall-friendly ive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer would fail. With ive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection.

♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

♦

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using FTP: 1.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to configure the measurement devices.

2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement)

3.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

4.

Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.

5.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6.

After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

Page 110

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.7.2.1 FTP Transfer Properties dialog Open the FTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the FTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals without NMR, each connection must have its own IP address.

♦

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used.

♦

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. Port refers to the port used by the FTP server. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the FTP server. In the field you must enter a valid for the FTP server. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer would fail. With ive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection. Select the ive mode option to activate ive mode. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail.

Page 111

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. ed types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the proxy. In the field you must enter a valid for the proxy. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one FTP session. Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. For example, the size of the ed file is 10MB. The number of threads is set to five. Nemo Outdoor splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. All five FTP transfer sessions are started simultaneously. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a fragment of the file. Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads. Resume is not ed with multi threaded FTP transfers. In case of a data drop, all threads will start from the beginning. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server. If you are receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

♦

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server, we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt, filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data, this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these files is defined in the Interface Properties – Paths dialog. Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with -specified file size. This functionality is available with FTP testing. The file is named with following format _ .bin. Select the Write local file to disk option to save the ed file on disk.

♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Page 112

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.7.3

Configuring the SFTP protocol Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. The server can be any standard SFTP server. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The SFTP module s firewall-friendly ive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer would fail. With ive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection.

♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

♦

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using SFTP: 1.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the measurement devices.

2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement)

3.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

4.

Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog.

5.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6.

After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

Page 113

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.7.3.1 SFTP Transfer Properties dialog Open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the SFTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals without NMR, each connection must have its own IP address.

♦

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used.

♦

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the SFTP server. In the field you must enter a valid for the SFTP server. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. ed types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy.

Page 114

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the proxy. In the field you must enter a valid for the proxy. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one SFTP session. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. If you are receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

♦

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server, we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt, filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data, this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these files is defined in the Interface Properties – Paths dialog. Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with -specified file size. This functionality is available with SFTP testing. The file is named with following format _ .bin. Select the Write local file to disk option to save the ed file on disk.

♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

6.7.4

Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol The HTTP(S) testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP(S) protocol. The HTTP(S) protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP(S) testing, the selects one file that will be ed or ed through the HTTP(S) protocol and this data transfer is measured.

♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using HTTP(S): 1.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the measurement devices.

Page 115

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement)

3.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

4.

Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog.

5.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6.

After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

6.7.4.1 HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog Open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices view. The same dialog is used for defining HTTPS transfer properties.

In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog, you can define the required data transfer settings. Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. ed types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

Page 116

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the proxy. In the field you must enter a valid for the proxy. Select the appropriate Authentication Scheme and define the name and for the authentication. Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. For sending, there are two options: POST and PUT. Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time stamp. The number of threads can be defined by the . Each thread transfers the entire file. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be ed when data is received. For example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be ed at a time. If you are sending HTTP data, URL defines the destination. To define a port for the transfer, type the port number after the URL, for example, http://www.yourcompany.com:85. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals without NMR, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them.

♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, you can use the same URL for all of them.

♦

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. To make consecutive transfers, create a script with several HTTP transfers. See chapter Making script files for instructions on making scripts. Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. The default location for these files is defined in the Interface Properties – Paths dialog.

♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with -specified file size. This functionality is available with HTTP testing. The file is named with following format _ .bin. Select the Write local file to disk option to save the ed file on disk. agent allows you to define the agent string used for the HTTP/HTTPS transfer. It is by default Nemo Outdoor, but it is possible to define another agent. Please see the http://agents.my-addr.com/_agent_request/_agent_examples-and-_agent_types.php for further details er agents. Select the Use SSL encryption option to transfer the files over a HTTPS connection.

Page 117

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.7.5

Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP Browsing protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP testing, the selects one URL address that will be ed through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured.

♦

If you are experiencing problems with HTTP browsing testing, such as, the page ing time is increased, disable the following LAN settings: Automatically detect settings and Proxy server.

To set up data measurements using HTTP browsing protocol: 1.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the measurement devices.

2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement).

3.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

4.

Define HTTP browsing-related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog.

5.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6.

After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

Page 118

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.7.5.1 Browser Transfer Properties dialog Open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the Browsing item in the Devices view.

URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be ed. For example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testbrowser.htm. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer will fail. Select or clear the Display browser window option to display/hide the browser window during the data transfer. If Decode content information is selected, information about the images, texts and links are written to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information. In the Additional headers field you can type a custom HTTP header, for example, for identifying the agent. The ed page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to the whole page is written to the measurement file. The cache is disabled by default. PPP and RLC layer data throughputs are logged during the browser testing. The average PPP and RLC data throughputs are also available. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context was active (PAC- PAD). The connection setup time and the time can be seen in Nemo Outdoor or calculated with Nemo Analyze ♦

For multi browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be used for multiple simultaneous data connections, e.g. for benchmarking purposes as each connection must have its own IP address (does not apply when NMR is used).

♦

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Page 119

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.7.6

Configuring the POP3 protocol POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP protocol for sending emails.

♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using POP3: 1.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the measurement devices.

2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement)

3.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

4.

Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings – POP3 dialog. Also define the test emails that are used in the measurement.

5.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6.

After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

6.7.6.1 E-Mail Settings – POP3 dialog Open the E-Mail Settings (POP3) dialog by double-clicking the POP3 item in the Devices view.

POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements.

Page 120

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each connection must have its own IP address.

♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used. Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the POP3 server. In the field you must enter a valid for the POP3 server. Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. ed types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the proxy. In the field you must enter a valid for the proxy. POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes. Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received from the e-mail server. Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will save disk space. The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

6.7.7

Configuring the SMTP protocol POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP protocol for sending emails.

♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

Page 121

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To set up data measurements using SMTP: 1.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the measurement devices.

2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement)

3.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

4.

Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings – SMTP dialog. Also define the test emails that are used in the measurement.

5. 6.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files). After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

6.7.7.1 E-Mail Settings – SMTP dialog Open the E-Mail Settings (SMTP) dialog by double-clicking the SMTP item in the Devices view.

SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements. Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its own IP address.

Page 122

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used.

♦

Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own. Therefore, it is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators' SIM cards. Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the SMTP server. In the field you must enter a valid for the SMTP server. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. ed types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the proxy. In the field you must enter a valid for the proxy. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes. Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. Click the Edit button to open the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message.

Page 123

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.7.7.2 E-Mail Editor dialog Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use.

New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor. Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail messages. Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use. Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use. Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail. Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message. Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.

6.7.8

Configuring the IMAP protocol POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP protocol for sending emails.

♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

Page 124

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To set up data measurements using IMAP: 1.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the measurement devices.

2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement).

3.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

4.

Define IMAP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings – IMAP dialog. Also define the test emails that are used in the measurement.

5.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6.

After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

6.7.8.1 E-Mail Settings – IMAP dialog Open the E-Mail Settings (IMAP) dialog by double-clicking the IMAP item in the Devices view.

IMAP server settings define settings for the IMAP server used in the measurements. Server name defines a name or an IP address for the server. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its own IP address.

♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used. Port refers to the port used by the server.

Page 125

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the name field you must enter a valid name for the server. In the field you must enter a valid for the server. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. ed types are Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In the name field you must enter a valid name for the proxy. In the field you must enter a valid for the proxy. IMAP receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes. Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received from the e-mail server. Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will save disk space. The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

6.7.9

Configuring the WAP protocol The WAP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the WAP protocol. The WAP protocol is used, for example, in web browsing. In the WAP testing, the selects one file that will be ed through the WAP protocol and this data transfer is measured.

♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using WAP: 1.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the measurement devices.

2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement)

3.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

4.

Page 126

Define WAP Gateway settings in the WAP Transfer Properties dialog.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6.

After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

6.7.9.1 WAP Transfer Properties dialog Open the WAP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the WAP item in the Devices view.

WAP transfer properties define settings for the WAP gateway used in the measurements. WAP gateway host defines a name or an IP address for the WAP gateway. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its own IP address. WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be ed. For example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be ed at a time. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them.

♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same URL can be used.

♦

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. To make consecutive s, create a script with several WAP transfers. See chapter Making script files for instructions on making scripts.

Page 127

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Local file defines the output file and location for WAP testing. The default location for these files is defined in the Interface Properties – Paths dialog. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

6.7.10 Configuring the streaming protocol ♦

Note that to make video streaming quality measurements, Microsoft Network Monitor must be installed and IP packet capturing must be enabled. Refer to chapter IP packet capturing for more information. The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the streaming protocol. The streaming protocol is used, for example, in video streaming. In the streaming testing, the selects one file that will be ed through the streaming protocol and this data transfer is measured.

♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific. In order to make streaming measurements with Nemo Outdoor version 7.20 onwards, you need to have VLC player v. 2.1.0 or newer installed. With Nemo Outdoor versions 6.40 - 7.10, you need to have VLC player v. 2.0.6 or newer (32-bit) installed on the computer. You can VLC from Nemo Club http://nemoclub.anite.com (Nemo Outdoor - Drivers for Test Mobiles and Other Devices) or from http://www.videolan.org/vlc. With Nemo Outdoor 6.2 and older versions, you need to have RealPlayer version 11 installed on the computer. You can RealPlayer 11 from Nemo Club http://nemoclub.anite.com (Nemo Outdoor - Drivers for Test Mobiles and Other Devices).

To set up data measurements using streaming: 1.

Install VLC.

2.

Install Microsoft Network Monitor.

3.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the measurement mobile.

4.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties – Measurement dialog. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement.

5.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

6.

Define Streaming properties (see Streaming Properties).

7.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

8.

After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

6.7.10.1

Streaming Properties dialog

Open the Streaming Properties dialog by double-clicking the Streaming item in the Devices view.

Page 128

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

Note that if the Streaming item is not available in the Devices view, VLC is not installed on the computer. You can a free player from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.

URL defines the IP address (http or rtsp) of the video file that will be streamed. For example, rtsp://yourcompany.com/testfile.rm or videos from YouTube (m.youtube.com/video). Only one file will be ed at a time. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. To make consecutive s, create a script with several streaming sessions. See chapter Making script files for instructions on making scripts. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will fail. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will fail. Rebuffering timeout defines the maximum allowed buffering duration during video playback. Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the streaming. Select the Streaming quality option to activate streaming video quality measurements with PVI.

6.7.11 Configuring the trace route protocol By conducting trace route testing functionality, you can trace the servers pinged along the way to the target server. Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections. The ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With ping trace route testing it is also possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another. In case the network does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing, it is possible to show the location right before the host that is not responding. ♦

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server (number, name, and ) are operator-specific.

Page 129

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To set up data measurements using the trace route protocol: 1.

Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the measurement devices.

2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement Properties – Measurement)

3.

Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet session settings).

4.

See below how to define Trace Route properties.

5.

Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

6.

After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making data transfers).

6.7.11.1

Trace Route Properties dialog

Open the Trace Route Properties dialog by double-clicking the Trace Route item in the Devices view.

The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route measurement, for example, www.anite.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals, each connection must be given its own, separate IP address!

♦

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP address can be used!

♦

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation. HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.

Page 130

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target server. By selecting the Resolve host names item, the names of the pinged servers will be reported by Nemo Outdoor.

6.7.12 Making data transfers After you have configured the data connection and selected and configured the data protocol, you can start making the data transfers. ♦

Note! Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers.

To make data transfers: 1. ♦

Activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts

button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Scripts button. 2.

To make manual CS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and select Start Data Call. Wait until the call is connected and connection established.

3.

To make manual PS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and select Start Packet Session. Nemo Outdoor will automatically activate the PDP context and make the GPRS attach.

4.

Page 131

To end the data transfer/data call, select Stop Packet Session/ Stop Data Call.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.8

Streaming video quality testing Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the network. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. Nemo Outdoor s PVI and PEVQ-S streaming video quality testing. A video preview can be seen during the measurement in Nemo Outdoor. ♦

Note that it is only possible to make single video quality measurements. Before starting video streaming quality measurements, select the video quality algorithm used, PEVQ-S or PVI, from the Device Configuration – Voice/Video quality page.

In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PEVQ-S, you will need to install WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player on the computer and to define PEVQ-S settings in the PEVQ-S dialog. WinPCAP and Flash Player are available in the Nemo product package and Nemo Club or you can them from the product websites. In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PVI, you will need to install VLC 2.0.6 or newer on the computer and to define streaming video settings in the Streaming Properties dialog. VLC is available in the Nemo product package and Nemo Club or you can it from the product website.

Page 132

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

PVI video quality parameters are not available with 64-bit operating systems. PVI streaming without video quality parameters is ed with both 32- and 64-bit operating systems.

Making streaming video quality measurements with PEVQ-S: 1.

Check that WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player are installed on the computer.

2.

Select the PEVQ-S option from the Device Configuration – Voice/video quality page.

3.

Define the PEVQ-S settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.

4.

Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button

. From the Measurement menu,

select All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test devices or <device name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with just one device. 5.

You can view, for example, from a line graph some streaming parameters. Open a line graph (Data | Line Graph | New). Press the Add New Layer button and select Video Quality MOS in the Y field and click OK. The graph will now display the selected parameter.

6.

From the Measurement menu, select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.

Making streaming video quality measurements with PVI: 1.

Check that VLC is installed on the computer.

2.

Define the video streaming settings in the Streaming Properties dialog.

3.

Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button

. From the Measurement menu,

select All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test devices or <device name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with just one device. 4.

You can view, for example, from a line graph some streaming parameters. Open a line graph (Data | Line Graph | New). Press the Add New Layer button and select Video Quality MOS in the Y field and click OK. The graph will now display the selected parameter.

5.

From the Measurement menu, select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.

Page 133

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.8.1

PEVQ-S Properties dialog When making video streaming quality measurements with the PEVQ-S algorithm, you need to define some settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.

Video offers a selection of preloaded videos that can be used in the testing. Only these preloaded videos can be used for testing. The videos must be stored in folder Nemo Tools\Video Files. To update the video files from the Opticom server, click the Update button. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer will fail. Select or clear the Display video stream option to display/hide the video stream window during the data transfer. The dialog also displays some information about the network adapters recognized by Nemo Outdoor. If there are problems with PEVQ-S testing, check that your device appears on the list. If not, restart the laptop and the adapter should appear on the list.

Page 134

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.9

VoIP calls With the optional VoIP module combined to Nemo Outdoor, a is able to perform IP telephony measurements on the IP networks based on the established VoIP sessions.

In order to be able to make VoIP call measurements, you will need to install a SIP server. Nemo Outdoor VoIP system is compatible with Asterisk SIP Server. To find more information on installing the Asterisk SIP server, to http://www.asterisk.org/applications/pbx

Page 135

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To start making VoIP call measurements, you will need to define some VoIP session settings in the SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configuration dialogs. Open the SIP Server Settings dialog by double-clicking the SIP Server item in the Devices view.

Domain defines the address of the SIP server, e.g. pbx.nemo.fi. Port defines the SIP port. The default SIP port is 5060. name/ defines the name that the has ed to the server and the corresponding . Connection timeout defines the timeout while trying to connect to the server. Registration duration defines the duration for which the SIP registration is valid. Automatic registration, when selected, automatically s the to the SIP server (as soon as Packet Session has been created). When selected, Use SIP proxy option enables the to send outbound SIP messager via Proxy. Proxy address/port defines the proxy, through which SIP messages are sent.

Page 136

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Open the VoIP Call Configuration dialog by double-clicking the VoIP Call item in the Devices view.

SIP callee address defines the SIP address of the call receiver. Audio codecs for the call can be selected from the list by selecting the box next to them. The order of the codecs is significant since the first codec is offered as the primary codec when making a call to a counterparty. For example, in the image above the primary codec offered for an outgoing call is G729/8000. In addition, only selected codecs are used while negotiating the codec in the case of an incoming call. Select the Voice quality option to enable voice quality measurements for VoIP calls. Please note that this option is available after you have selected the VoIP only option from the Device configuration for mobiles and modems dialog. Reference sample filename refers to the file used as the reference sample in the voice quality measurements. Click the Browse button to select a file. Select the Save sample files option to save the received sample files on the laptop. With the Prefix for received sample files option you can define a prefex that will be added to the filename of all received sample files. With the Save only samples below threshold option you choose to save only those samples that are below a -definable threshold (MOS score). Script settings defines the duration of the call and the call attempt timeout in seconds.

Page 137

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Making VoIP measurements: 1.

Define SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configurations.

2.

To start packet session, click on the Measurement control button

| Start Packet

Session. 3.

To SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | SIP Server.

4.

To start VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Start VoIP Call.

5.

To end VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Stop VoIP Call.

6.

Finally, to un SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | Un SIP Server (Note: This is not a mandatory step, a new call can be made without uning)

6.10 Application testing Nemo Outdoor offers several application testing features.

6.10.1 Facebook testing In order to be able to test the Facebook application, you will need to set up a Facebook . To start running Facebook tests, you will need to define some Facebook settings in the Facebook Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Facebook item in the Devices view. ♦

Please note that if the Facebook item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo Outdoor license does not Facebook testing.

Page 138

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

If you already have a Facebook , type in the name. The name can be found from the General Settings in Facebook. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer will fail. access token is required for Facebook testing. Enter the name and click the Get Access Token button. You will be redirected to the Facebook page. Enter your information and select the Keep me logged in to… option. Click . You will return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.

Application ID and Application access token fields are required only if you have your own application for accessing Facebook. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty and the Nemo Fabo application will be used by default.

Page 139

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

When performing Facebook testing with multiple devices, use the same Facebook on all of them. With Nemo Invex II, use different UICs for the data connections and then you can use individual Facebook s for each of them. You can define a Photo that will be ed on the wall of your Facebook profile. Comment is text that will either be posted as a status update (without a photo) or as a caption for a photo. Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days items will be retrieved from the wall when the executes the Get Wall Feed command. After defining Facebook settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the Measurement control button and select one of the Facebook-related commands. The following information is logged for each command: operation type, success/failure, time elapsed, and amount of data received/sent.

Get friend list will the friend list from you Facebook . Get wall feed will the wall feed from you Facebook . The amount of data ed is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Facebook Configuration dialog. ♦

Please note that Facebook has its own limits for the number of actions per day. Check the Facebook Help Center for current information about the limits. Post status update will the text typed in the Comment field and post it on the wall of your Facebook profile. Post photo will the photo selected in the Facebook Configuration dialog and the text typed in the Comment field as caption on the wall of your Facebook profile.

Page 140

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.10.2 Twitter testing In order to be able to test the Twitter application, you will need to set up a Twitter . To start running Twitter tests, you will need to define some settings in the Twitter Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Twitter item in the Devices view. ♦

Please note that if the Twitter item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo Outdoor license does not Twitter testing.

Page 141

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

If you want to follow the Twitter feed of a specific or a hashtag, type in the name/hashtag in the @/#Feed field without the @ or # symbols. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer will fail.

Page 142

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

access token and access token secret are required for Twitter testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will be redirected to the Twitter page.

Enter your information and select the me option. Click Sign In. You will return to Nemo Outdoor and the access token and access token secret will appear in the field. Application access token and Application access token secret fields are required only if you have your own application for accessing Twitter. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty. You can define an Image that will be ed to your Twitter feed. Comment is text that will be posted as a tweet. Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days items will be retrieved from the feed when the executes the Get Feed command. ♦

Please note that Twitter has its own limits for the number of actions per day. Check the Twitter Help Center for current information about the limits.

Page 143

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

After defining Twitter settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Twitter and then one of the Twitter-related commands.

Get Feed will your own Twitter feed. Load Profile will the Twitter feed from the selected (defined in the Twitter Configuration dialog, @ / #Feed field). Follow Feed will the feed from the selected Twitter hashtag. The amount of data ed is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Twitter Configuration dialog. Post Feed will the text typed in the Twitter Configuration dialog, Comment field and post it on your Twitter feed. Post Image will the image selected in the Twitter Configuration dialog on your Twitter feed.

Page 144

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

You can follow Twitter-related statistics in a grid.

6.10.3 Instagram testing In order to be able to test the Instagram application, you will need to set up an Instagram . To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Instagram Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Instagram item in the Devices view. ♦

Please note that if the Instagram item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo Outdoor license does not Instagram testing.

Page 145

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

If you already have an Instagram , type in the name. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer will fail. access token is required for Instagram testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will be redirected to the Instagram page. Enter your information and click . You will return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.

Application ID and Application secret fields are required only if you have your own application for accessing Instagram. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty. Searchable tag/name defines a tag or a name from which the feed will be ed. Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days items will be retrieved from the feed when the executes the Get Feed command.

Page 146

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Instagram and then one of the Instagram-related commands.

Get Feed will the Instagram feed of a selected . Get Self Feed will your own Instagram feed. Get Popular Feed will the popular feed from Instagram. Search Media with a Tag will the feed from the selected hashtag (defined in the Instagram Configuration dialog). The amount of data ed is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Instagram Configuration dialog. You can follow Instagram-related statistics in a grid.

Page 147

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.10.4 Dropbox testing In order to be able to test the Dropbox application, you will need to set up a Dropbox . To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Dropbox Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Dropbox item in the Devices view. ♦

Please note that if the Dropbox item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo Outdoor license does not Dropbox testing.

Page 148

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

access token is required for Dropbox testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will be redirected to the Dropbox page. Enter your information and click Sign In. You will return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.

Application access token is required only if you have your own application for accessing Dropbox. Otherwise you can leave this field empty. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer will fail. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the Dropbox server. If you are receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data, this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these files is defined in the Interface Properties – Paths dialog. ♦

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

Page 149

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Dropbox. Nemo Outdoor will perform the Dropbox data transfer.

You can follow Dropbox-related statistics in a grid.

Page 150

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.11 SMS testing SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. Open the SMS Testing dialog by double-clicking the Short Messaging Service item in the Devices view. ♦

Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.92 VoLTE option is required for SMS over LTE testing. In addition, if you are using the Samsung IMS, you will need the Samsung IMS IR.92 VoLTE option.

Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages. Enter the number without spaces and with the international country code; for example, +3581234567. Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the messages are sent. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings. Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated. When the End-to-end message option is selected, a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is added to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. When the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database, Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time it took for it to reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing. All handlers sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages.

Page 151

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Message refers to the -defined test message that will be sent. The limit is set to 15000 characters.

Making SMS testing measurements: ♦

Note that with CDMA terminals, before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, you must send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. After that Nemo Outdoor can be used to send the same message again. 1.

Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces) where you are sending the test SMS message.

2.

Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test SMS. The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings.

3.

Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated.

4.

Type in the test message and click OK.

5.

Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button

. From the Measurement menu,

select All Devices | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with all test devices or <device name> | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the test SMS. 6.

You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the Short Message Service item and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected SMS testing-related events.

6.11.1 SMS testing with CDMA terminals SMS testing with CDMA does not require you to do any configurations prior to SMS testing for the terminal. The verified CDMA terminals ing SMS testing are •

Huawei C7600

•

LG C680

•

LG C676

•

LG KX206

•

LG KX256

•

LG VX8100

•

LG VX8350

•

LG VX8360

•

Samsung SCH A870

The testing goes as follows: 1.

Connect and add the terminal to Nemo Outdoor.

2.

Prior to starting SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, send an SMS to the target phone number from the phone’s keypad.

Page 152

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3.

In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button

and select Send SMS

Message. Nemo Outdoor sends the same message as was sent by the from the actual phone interface by retrieving the text message from the phone’s Saved messages folder.

6.12 MMS testing MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network. MMS messages can be sent manually and with scripts. In addition to successfully sent/received MMS messages, also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded enabling statistical success rate calculations. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay. Also separate delays from Attach, PDP context activation, logging to MMSC, and message sending/receiving are recorded. In order to be able to make MMS measurements, you will need to define some MMS-related settings in the Packet Session Settings dialog. ♦

Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS messages.

♦

If you are using Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles for MMS testing, please see chapter MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121. Some special MMS settings are required.

♦

Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements, the script must not contain a PDP activation command.

6.12.1 Packet session settings for MMS Open the Packet Session Settings - MMS dialog by double-clicking the Multimedia Messaging Service item in the Devices view. The MMS tab is opened by default. Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. All the parameters in the Packet Session and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator-specific. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. the operator of the network that you are measuring.

Page 153

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.12.1.1

MMS

In the MMS tab, all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements.

MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. This setting is operator-specific. MMSC name defines the MMS Service Center name. This setting is operator-specific. MMSC defines the MMS Service Center . This setting is operator-specific. WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. This setting is operator-specific. WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. This setting is operator-specific. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is terminated. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is terminated. Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement. Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.

Page 154

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.12.2 MMS Editor dialog Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use.

New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor. Open MMS Message opens an Open dialog where you can open premade MMS messages. Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use. Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use. Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message. Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message. Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message.

6.12.3 Making MMS measurements Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements. ♦

You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated.

♦

Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS messages.

♦

If you are using Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles for MMS testing, please see chapter MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121. Some special MMS settings are required.

Making MMS measurements:

Page 155

1.

Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (see Packet session settings for MMS).

2.

Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3.

If you want to make automated measurements, create a script for MMS measurements (see Making script files).

4.

If you are making manual measurements, that is, not using a script, select Send MMS Message from the Measurement control

menu or from the Measurement menu.

Nemo Outdoor will send the test MMS. 5.

If you are using a script, activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. This will start the measurement.

6.

You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the Multimedia Message Service item and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected MMS testing-related events.

6.12.4 MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles before you can use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor.

Changing MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121:

Page 156

1.

On the phone main window, press Messaging.

2.

In the Messaging view, press Options.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Page 157

3.

From the menu, select Settings.

4.

From the Settings view, select Multimedia message.

5.

Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.

Select Multimedia retrieval and change it to Off.

7.

Select Allow anon. msgs. and change it to Off by pressing the navigation button on the phone, or by selecting Options| Change| No.

8.

Page 158

Press on the navigation key to change the setting for Receive adverts from Yes to No.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9. Press the navigation button on the phone to change the Receive report setting from Yes to No.

10. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile off and on.

Page 159

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.13 USSD testing USSD testing allows you to monitor how USSD messages are transferred in the network. Open the USSD Message dialog by double-clicking the USSD Message item in the Devices view.

Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the USSD sending attempt is terminated. Message refers to the -defined test message that will be sent. The limit for USSD messages is 182 characters.

Sending USSD messages: 1.

Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the message sending attempt is terminated.

2.

Page 160

Type in the test message and click OK.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button

. In the Devices view, click the

Measurement Control button and select Send USSD Message to send a USSD message with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the message.

4.

You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the USSD item and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected USSD message testing-related events.

6.14 Start external application This feature allows s to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the automatic measurement sequence. You can define the executable as well as the command-line parameters. With Nemo Invex, you can run external applications also on the measurement servers (UICs). The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that are not built into Nemo Outdoor. This enables, for example, the testing of data protocols that are not currently ed by Nemo Outdoor. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the PPP data throughput parameter. The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. An APP event is written to the log file when a web browser is launched and closed. The must set the cache size to minimum from the browser settings. The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor, Add menu. Select Start External Application from the menu.

Page 161

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making measurements. Define the path where the application .exe file is located on your computer. For example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox.exe. ♦

Please note that clicking the Browse button will only show the folders on the local computer. If you want to run an external application on a measurement server (Nemo Invex), check the path from that server, for example, with Remote Desktop and type in the path manually. If you select the Wait until completed option, the test script will be on hold until the external application is closed. Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is started. For example, if you start Internet Explorer, define here a URL (http://www.anite.com/nemo). You can also leave the field empty. Note that there should be no spaces between the characters in the pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field. Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For example, C:\Temp.

6.15 ICMP Ping The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping measurements simultaneously with data transfers.

Page 162

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged, for example, www.anite.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. The value determines the size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the reply packet that the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor. Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the server. If this time is exceeded, the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout parameter (=-1). Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. In addition to the duration, also define where the delay will occur. The options are: •

Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before sending new request. If the delay is less than the ping delay, a new request is sent immediately after the reply.

•

Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.

Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping measurement is repeated. Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until you stop it manually. Example 1. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 1 s. New request is sent every 1.1s (100ms + 1000ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is sent every 1000ms.

Page 163

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Ping reply

Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 50ms. New request is sent every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is sent every 100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request.

Ping reply

To make ping measurements: 1.

Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices view.

2.

Define the required ping parameters and click OK.

3.

Click the Start Recording button

4.

In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button

. and select Start

Packet Session. Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says ‘PDP Context Activated’. 5.

From the Measurement control menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the Ping until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping measurement. Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the -defined number of times.

6.16 Indoor mode Nemo Outdoor indoor mode should be used when making measurements indoors. The mode is activated by clicking the

button in the toolbar or by selecting Indoor Mode from the

Measurement menu. When the indoor mode is activated the functionality of Nemo Outdoor changes: •

To start measuring an Indoor window needs to be open and a floorplan loaded.

•

When the measurement is started, the is prompted to select the starting position in the Indoor window. The selected location is used to automatically create the first marker.

•

Measurement archive compression is enabled automatically, in other words, the files below are compressed into a single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are deleted.

Page 164

o

measurement files (.nmf)

o

binary files (.nbl)

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

•

o

packet capture files (.pcap)

o

marker files (.mrk)

o

indoor map files (.tab and image)

The floorplan file or the current floor layer cannot be changed during measurements to prevent mismatch during post-processing.

•

Information about the current mode (Indoor/Outdoor) is written to the measurement file header.

6.16.1 Viewing indoor maps Open an indoor map by selecting Data | Indoor | New and click the Open Map button. The ed indoor map types are MapInfo, iBwave, and Google Earth maps (.kmz). Please refer to Google Earth documentation on how to create KMZ files. To view measurement data on KMZ maps, select Data | Indoor | New. Change the file type to Google Earth Files (.kmz). Select a map file and click Open. KMZ and MapInfo maps have the same functionalities. For more information on iBwave files, please see chapter iBwave maps. It is possible to view selected parameters on an indoor map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the drop-down menu.

To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (.mrk) attached to the measurement file (.nmf). To move the markers on the map, select a marker in the Markers | Index field, click on Move and select a new destination for the marker.

Page 165

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

On the map you can view, for example, a floorplan of the test site. While you are performing the measurement and walking around in the building, use markers to draw the measurement route on the floor plan. Markers are added by clicking the Add marker and Add marker on GPS position buttons in the Indoor map toolbar.

Select the Add marker tool and click on the map. The marker will be placed in the selected location. The Add marker on GPS position tool can be used only when measuring in Indoor mode with a georeferenced floorplan and valid GPS coordinates. The marker will be placed in the current location. You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map. Map layers can be saved to .gst file and also as a custom window.

Page 166

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.2 Floorplans and BTS files You can also use BTS files on indoor maps. DAS and small cell BTS types are also ed. Open a route on an indoor map. Click the Add BTS File button and browse for a BTS file.

After the BTS file is loaded, select a device that will be connected with the BTS file. Click OK.

Page 167

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The BTS icons will appear on the map and when the measurement file is played back, a line is drawn from the test device to the serving base station.

Page 168

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.3 Multiple routes and floorplans You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in the side to add a route, and go through the steps mentioned above. The floorplan below has three routes, two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default color. When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists, you can switch between the color legends in the Color legends side .

You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the Layers view. This makes it possible for you to have, for example, indoor maps of different floors on the same building at once. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons.

Page 169

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.4 Indoor route planning Prior to conducting indoor measurements, you can plan the route in the indoor map window. You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint

button in the map toolbar, and

clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side is also activated. A new route plan (.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan

icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map

popup menu.

The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with outdoor maps. See chapter Route plans for more information.

Page 170

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.5 iBwave maps iBwave indoor maps can be viewed in Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to iBwave documentation on how to create iBwave maps that can be imported to Nemo Outdoor. iBwave files may contain UTM coordinates in addition to WGS84 coordinates. Nemo Outdoor s both coordinate formats when loading transmitter files. Please note that both the tab file and the transmitter file must use the same coordinate system. To view measurement data on iBwave maps, select Data | Indoor | New. Change the file type to iBwave Design Files. Select an iBwave map file and click Open.

If the map file contains several building, choose one of them and click OK.

Page 171

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The map is opened. With the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons you can move the view between floors. From the Layers list you can hide and displays the different floors and the BTS files for each floor.

Nemo Outdoor will not automatically place the measurement route on the correct floor. Therefore, when making measurements on several floors, it is advised to make a separate log file for each floor and, for example, include the floor number in the measurement file name. Alternatively, you can add a textual note in the log file identifying the floor number in question. This way you will be able to place the measurement route on the correct floor when playing back the log file.

6.16.5.1

BTS files on iBwave maps

You can also view BTS sites on iBwave maps. An iBwave map file contains, by default, BTS sites but you will also need a separate BTS file (.nbf or .csv) that has the same BTS sites with matching cell IDs than the iBwave file. Without the .nbf/csv file, BTS cell information and antenna directions will not be displayed.

Page 172

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

First open an iBwave map and click the Add BTS File button to open the BTS file.

Select the BTS file and then select the device connected with the map. Click OK.

Page 173

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The BTS file appears in the Layers but to make it appear on the map, you will need to associate it with the iBwave BTS file. To do this, right-click one of the iBwave BTS layers and select Properties.

On the Linked BTS page, select the file that you opened on the map and click OK.

Page 174

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The BTS sites and cell information are now displayed on the map.

6.16.6 DAS anomaly analysis With DAS anomaly analysis, can check and in-building small cells and DAS (Distributed Antenna Systems) antennas giving simple , fail, or untested results for each cell. Indoor small cell antennas and transmitters can be displayed on the indoor map with iBwave indoor plans and Nemo BTS files (.nbf). DAS anomaly analysis is enabled from BTS Properties.

Enable DAS anomaly analysis by selecting a device in the field. Cell test radius in meters defines how close the marker needs to be to the cell in order to perform the DAS anomaly analysis.

Page 175

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Cell transparency defines how the circle is drawn. 0% is almost solid color and 100% is transparent. Signal level limits (dBm) defines the /fail limit for signal level for each system. If the signal level is above the defined limit, the test result is ed and if the signal level is below the limit, the test result is failed. Cell search mode defines on which sites the test is performed. •

Full: Requires that the BTS file contains the system, channel number, and scrambling code information.

•

System and channel: Requires that the BTS file contains the system and channel number information. Use this option with iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does not include the correct cell type information.

•

System: Requires that the BTS file contains the system information. Use this option with iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does not include the correct cell type information.

When the analysis is enabled, a circle is drawn around DAS and small cell cells. The color of the circle depends on the cell test status: •

Untested = gray

•

Failed = red

•

ed = green

Whenever a marker is placed within the test radius of the serving cell location, the current signal level of the serving cell is checked. If the signal level exceeds the defined limit (signal level limit defined in the BTS Properties dialog), the cell is considered as ed (green) and if the signal level is below the configured limit, the cell is considered as failed (red).

Page 176

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The same analysis is also performed during playback mode if the DAS anomaly analysis is enabled. In addition to the map view, a DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the results for each cell. The results view can be displayed/hidden from the indoor map popup menu.

6.16.7 RF ingress analysis RF ingress analysis calculates distributions related to indoor (small cell and DAS) vs outdoor (macro) cell coverage and gives real-time information of detected RF ingress. The analysis is based on the cell type information read from the BTS file (.nbf). A cell is considered to be indoor or small cell if the cell type in the BTS file is SMALL_CELL or DAS, otherwise the cell type is macro cell. ♦

Please note that a BTS file must be set for all devices before RF ingress measurement is started. If a BTS file has not been selected, all cells will be considered as macro cells and the statistics calculated will be incorrect. The signal strength comparison is done for each system and the comparison is performed for serving, neighbor, detected, listed and monitored cells in each system. •

LTE: RSRP

•

UMTS: RS

•

GSM: RXL Sub/RXL full (neighbor set)

•

CDMA: RS

You can also plot RF ingress on a map using the colorset Cell type (RF Ingress).

Page 177

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.8 Indoor map popup menu Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map.

Page 178

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.8.1

Custom Window Properties dialog

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

6.16.8.2

Custom window - Save changes

Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

6.16.8.3

Custom window - Save as new custom window

Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups.

6.16.8.4

Save as - CSV file

Use the Save as CSV File command to export the active view into CSV format. See chapter CSV file export for more information.

6.16.8.5

Save as - Image

Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

6.16.8.6

Save as - MapInfo Tab-file

Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format. See chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information.

Page 179

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.8.7

Move view to

With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See chapter View groups for more information on view groups.

6.16.8.8

Open map

By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

6.16.8.9

Save map

By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name.

6.16.8.10

Import map

You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as indoor maps. Click the Import Map button in the map toolbar or select Import Map from the Data | Indoor menu. Select an image file and click Open. The Map Import Parameters dialog is opened.

In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you need to geo the image file or enter the exact dimensions of the map area.

Page 180

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To use georegistration, select Geo and click OK. The image file will appear on the Geo Image map as a transparent box.

Adjust the location, width, height, and rotation of the image so that the image overlaps the right spot on the map. Move the mouse cursor on top of the image so that the cursor changes into an arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Now you can move the image on the map. To move the map beneath the image, move mouse cursor on the map so that the cursor changes into an arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Finally click OK to save the coordinates.

6.16.8.11

Route plan - Create

The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map window, after which you can save the route plan.

6.16.8.12

Route plan - Open

Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor map.

6.16.8.13

Route plan - Save

The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

Page 181

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.8.14

Save as MapInfo Tab-file

Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format. See chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information.

6.16.8.15

Add waypoints

Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

6.16.8.16

Tool

The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With the Add Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection changes the cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. The Zoom In and Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

6.16.8.17

Center on new marker

The Center on New Marker option defines whether the indoor view is centered on a marker when it is inserted.

6.16.8.18

Auto center

The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected.

6.16.8.19

View entire map

The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.

6.16.8.20

View entire route

The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.

6.16.8.21

Textual comments

With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

Page 182

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.8.22

Add site

With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.

6.16.8.23

Color legends

Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.

6.16.8.24

DAS anomaly analysis results

When perfoming DAS anomaly analysis, the DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the results for each cell. This command hides/displays the results view.

6.16.8.25

Show layers

Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side .

6.16.8.26

Show marker info

Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.

6.16.8.27

Show markers

Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.

6.16.8.28

Show minimap

With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window. Minimap displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a red square.

6.16.8.29

Show waypoints

The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create and save a route plan for later use. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints for more information.

Page 183

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.16.8.30

Show zones

You can view zones on iBwave maps. Zones in iBwave files are defined as MapInfo mif/mid files. Right-click on the map and select Show Zones to display/hide the zones on the floorplan. Click on a zone with the arrow tool to select the zone (the map is zoomed to the zone and the zone is drawn less transparent).

6.16.8.31

Full screen

Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking on Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.

6.16.8.32

Layer Properties – Indoor map

In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings. See chapter Route properties for more information.

6.16.8.33

Page 184

Indoor Properties dialog

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Offset between routes defines the offset (in pixels) between routes on an indoor map. This value is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset, would overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset values for individual routes, go to the Route Properties dialog and define the X and Y offset values. With the Save markers in lat/lon format when the floorplan uses UTM coordinates option you can select to save markers in GPS (lat/lon) WGS84 format when the iBwave map file has UTM coordinates. The coordinate system used is saved to the marker file. In playback mode, the coordinate system is detected when loading marker files so that both WGS84 and UTM format marker files are displayed correctly.

6.16.8.34

MapX Properties dialog

Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open Map button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.

If you are using MapInfo® maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the table shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position layer is under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the layer from the list and click the Remove button.

Page 185

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.17 Measurement profiles To make the measurement configuration for different devices more convenient, you can create measurement profiles. A measurement profile contains all the necessary settings for making data transfers, voice/video calls, sending messages, etc. The measurement profiles can also be exported to another Nemo Outdoor system. See chapter Export/import settings for more information on exporting settings. To create a new measurement profile, go to the Devices view and click the arrow button next to a service (e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select Edit Measurement Profiles.

In the Measurement Profiles dialog, click the Add button to create a new measurement profile for the selected service or select one of the existing profiles. Type a name for the new measurement profile and click OK.

A configuration dialog for the selected service is opened. Enter the required information and click OK. The measurement profile is added to the Measurement Profiles dialog. In the future you can just select the measurement profile from the list and start measuring.

6.18 IP packet capturing With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal®. A separate log file is generated for each test terminal making data transfers. In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor:

Page 186

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

1.

First, install Microsoft Network Monitor. Go to Microsoft website to the free Network Monitor installation package. Select the NM34_x86.exe (for 32-bit Windows) or NM34_x64.exe (for 64-bit Windows) installation file and click on .

2.

Once the installation file is ed, double-click on it. The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation and follow the steps in the installation wizard to finish the installation.

3.

Next, install Nemo Outdoor.

4.

For 64-bit Windows you need to install an additional setup of Nemo Packet Monitor x64 7.x.x.exe (Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Packet Monitor must be of the same version) found in the Nemo Outdoor product package. Double-click the file and follow the steps in the installation wizard to finish the installation.

5.

Start Nemo Outdoor, add a device, and go to the Measurement Properties, Measurement page. Select the Enable IP Capture option.

♦

Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list, the Network Monitor driver is not installed.

IP packet capture measurement option has several states: •

Disabled: IP packet monitoring is not performed at all

•

Enabled: a separate .pcap file is not written but, for example, KPI, IP service access time is recorded

•

Partial logging: only message headers are recorded

•

Full logging: all messages are recorded

The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP capturing is enabled. To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full logging in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

6.19 Making script files ♦

Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners. The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. The extension for script files is .nsfx or .nsf (old script format). You can edit the Script file configuration in the Script Editor dialog. When editing scripts, it is possible to have several Script Editor dialogs open and to copy and paste commands from one script to another. You can access this dialog by selecting Measurement | Script Editor (Ctrl+E).

Page 187

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The table in the middle will show a list of all functions and parameters that will be executed during a measurement. Click the Add button to add commands in the script. Modify can be used to edit an existing script entry. Select a row from the table and click the button to change the settings for that function. Delete deletes the selected entry row. Move Up moves the selected entry row up by one row in the script. Move Down moves the selected entry down by one row in the script. Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script. Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the measurements. The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10,000. When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected, the settings that have been configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. For example, if you have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties – Configuration dialog, that number is used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties dialog does not appear. New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values. Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed. Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one, opens a dialog for inserting the file name. Close exits the dialog. Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the IF loop. Examples of conditions: •

“Is different”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm 

Page 188

Whenever the value is other than -70dBm, IF condition is triggered

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

•

“Is changed”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed 

Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes, the IF condition is triggered. The reference value is unknown, which means that when starting the measurement and when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received, the IF condition is triggered. The next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is different from the previous value. For example, 

Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm  triggers the IF string



Carrier RSSI value -70dBm  nothing happens



Carrier RSSI value -68dBm  Triggers the IF string

6.19.1 Script transfer stop commands With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. For example, a data transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes, instead of waiting for its completion. It is also possible to set a time duration for data transfers. If a data transfer is not completed during a -defined time, the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data transfer automatically. Please note that in this case the data disconnection status is written as Normal data disconnect.

The forced stop command, e.g., with voice calls, can be used in conjunction with conditional or wait commands as well. For example, if a call should be stopped when the system changes from GSM to UMTS, the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the system changes. In the example below, the voice call is started only when the serving system is GSM. Call duration is set to 120 seconds. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set with line three, Wait until system is UMTS but at most 120s. After the call is connected, the script starts waiting for the system to be changed to UMTS, or at most 120 seconds. The call is ended with End a voice call (forced) with line 4 after 120 seconds, or when system changes to UMTS; whichever comes first.

Page 189

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

GSM voice call example. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system changes to UMTS. The forced stop command can be used also to stop active data transfers. In the example below the script waits until the system changes to UMTS. Once the system is in UMTS, the script waits 5 seconds before making a voice call followed by PDP context activation and FTP data transfer. The script stops, waiting until the system changes to GSM, but at most for 60 seconds. If the system changes to GSM before 60 seconds, the voice call is continued normally until a 60-second call duration is reached. FTP data transfer is aborted immediately when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, whichever comes first. If line eight were End a voice call (forced), the voice call would be stopped immediately after inter-RAT handover occurred.

Page 190

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the following you will see a PS data and voice call example. The data transfer is aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds; voice call is continued. The call duration is 60 seconds.

In the following you will see another PS data and voice call example. The data transfer and voice call are aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, whichever comes first.

The voice call is aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, but data transfer is continued normally with the Stop FTP transfer (Normal) command.

Page 191

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.19.2 Add menu

The Add menu contains all the items that can be used in a script. Selecting an item may open a dialog where you need to define some parameters and settings. See earlier chapters for more detailed information on the dialogs. The Start External Application item is described in more detail in chapter Start external application. In the Script Editor, by clicking Add and selecting Send DTMF Characters you are able to send DTMF sequences. You can, for example, make calls to service numbers that work by using DTMF tones. This command can only be used during voice calls.

Page 192

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.19.2.1

Receive call

In the Incoming Call Configuration dialog you can define settings for incoming calls.

Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. Call reception timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call reception attempt. If the value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call reception attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Reception Timeout value is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. Select the Enable Nemo Server connection option to enable incoming calls from Nemo Server. Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define connection settings. Own number defines the device’s phone number. Server line defines the Nemo Server phone number. Select the Enable Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license s voice quality measurements.

Page 193

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples: 10s.wav, 4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files. Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the -defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved. ♦

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor.

♦

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds.

Page 194

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.19.2.2

Wait settings

To add pauses in the script, select Wait. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different conditions for the wait. You can also define custom conditions.

With the Wait until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script continues. With the Wait for all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization points inside the script file. Nemo Outdoor’s script group functionality enables you to synchronize the script files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. Both synchronization methods can be used together or separately depending on needs of the . In the following example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. The idea is to start FTP simultaneously. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is different. Wait for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the Wait settings dialog. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices.

Page 195

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called “PS data”.

Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be synchronized. In this example, it is not necessary to use the script group. As many synchronization points as needed can be added to the script files. It should be noted that the number of synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be equal. With the Wait Fixed and Random options you can define a fixed wait time (in ms) or a random time (define the minimum and maximum values in ms) and then select one of the following: •

Current time: wait (fixed or random) is added between items in the script.

•

Last notification: wait (fixed or random) is added after the selected notification. Select the notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script pause for 60 seconds after a call attempt event. This will prevent the script from continuing before the call attempt has completed. Note that also custom-made notifications can be selected here.

•

With the Custom condition option you can make the script wait for a custom condition. Click the Edit Rules button to access the Wait Custom Conditions dialog where you can define a wait condition. For example, you can define a specific parameter value.

Page 196

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

•

Next notification: script waits for the selected event notification to appear. Select the notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script wait until the system changes from GSM to UMTS.

•

Current system is: script file continues only when the system selected from the dropdown menu is in use.

•

But at most value is the maximum wait time in ms if the defined notification does not appear.

Adding a pause in the script file: 1.

First define the wait time in ms.

2.

Then define from which point onwards the wait time is calculated: from the current time or after a certain event notification, such as, call attempt.

3.

If you selected the Last notification or Next notification option, define also the maximum wait time in ms after which the script will continue.

Page 197

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.19.2.3

Advanced script settings

6.19.2.3.1

Conditional blocks

By selecting Advanced | If/End If, you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Here you can define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If - End If block in the script takes place. If the criteria set in this dialog are met, Outdoor will perform the set of commands within the If - End If block, and if the criteria are not met, this set of commands will be skipped altogether and the script resumes from the first item after the End If command.

Click on the Field tab to select a system and a parameter from the drop-down menu. In the Condition and Value fields you can define the value conditions for the parameter which have to be met for the commands inside the If-End If block to take place. In this example the serving system must be UMTS FDD. You can select the system in the Value drop-down menu. Click Add to list to add the condition to the list. If you want to remove the condition from the list, select it and click Remove. Click OK.

Page 198

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Next, add commands to the script from the Add menu, and move them to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the following example script, Serving sys.=5 on the fourth row in the Parameters field indicates the criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria are met, the commands between the If Condition and End If commands will be performed.

Page 199

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.19.2.3.2

Loops

You can add loops in the script files. By going to Add | Advanced | Loop/End Loop, you will enter the Loop Settings dialog.

You can select from the following loop options: •

Repeat the loop x times

•

Repeat the loop for x minutes

•

Repeat the loop until the time is x

•

Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met

With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set conditions for the loop to take place. Click the Field button to select a parameter. Then define the condition and value for the selected parameter. Finally click Add to list and OK to add the loop in the script.

Page 200

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the first example, the loop has been set to be repeated twice before continuing with the script. Click OK and add the wanted script commands in the script from the Add menu. You can move the commands to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the example below the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with the script.

The second loop option allows the to define criteria which need to be met for the loop to be repeated. In the example below the system and parameter (UMTS | Ec/N0 (Active)) have been selected from the Field drop-down menu. The condition for the loop is that the parameter value needs to be greater or equal to -5. Click Add to list and OK. The commands inside the loop block will be performed only and as long as the Ec/N0 (Active) value is greater or equal to -5.

Page 201

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long as the call is connected to UMTS. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM, the call stops.

6.19.2.3.3

Counters and timers

Counters and timers can be used with If and Loop commands as conditions. With a counter you can define a number of instances and with a timer you can define a certain time in seconds. Click the Add button in the Script Editor and select Advanced | Counter or Advanced | Start Timer. Define a name for the counter/timer and click OK. The counter/timer can now be selected as a condition in the If and Loop Condition Settings dialogs.

Page 202

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Below is an example of a script with both a timer and a counter. On row three there is a loop command with a counter condition called GSM calls and a timer condition called Duration. The loop is configured to repeat a voice call until one of the following conditions is met: number of calls in a GSM system is five or the loop has been running for 600 seconds.

6.19.3 Running scripts After you have created a script, it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on.

To run the script file: 1.

In the Measurement Properties, Scripts dialog, select the script in the Script File field. Note that you need to define the script for each device individually. The script can be different for each device.

Page 203

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.

Activate the Start/Stop Scripts (F8) button

. Nemo Outdoor will start running the

measurement according to the script file. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts Automatically option in the Interface Properties – General dialog, Nemo Outdoor will start running the script when you click the Start Recording button. 3.

The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file.

4.

During measurements, you can stop and start the script for each measurement device individually while the other devices will continue running their scripts. Select a device and click the Start/stop script state for selected device button

in the Devices view. You

can then control the device manually. 5.

After the script is finished, you can stop the recording (Measurement | Stop or Stop button

).

6.20 Measurement lists Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining multiple scripts. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one after another. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. You can also use measurement lists in idle mode. In Online mode, select Measurement | Start Measurement List to open the Measurement List dialog.

Page 204

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the measurement list is started. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file. Click Add New to add new measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list. Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-monthday hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day.

Page 205

%a

Abbreviated weekday name

%A

Full weekday name

%b

Abbreviated month name

%B

Full month name

%d

Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)

%H

Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)

%I

Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

%j

Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)

%m

Month as decimal number (01 – 12)

%M

Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)

%n

Sequence number (1 – )

%N

Sequence number (1 – )

%p

Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock

%S

Second as decimal number (00 – 59)

%U

Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53)

%w

Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)

%W

Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53)

%y

Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)

%Y

Year with century, as decimal number

%z

Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z

Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurement lists are paused or allowed to run. See chapter Measurement areas for more detailed information on creating measurement areas. Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished. Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished running. Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a certain period of time. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm). Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files reaches a certain limit. Define the size in kilobits (KB). Select the Save statistics to file option to enable the CSV file writing. Select the Send measurement results to server option to automatically the log files to an FTP or Nemo Xynergy server after running the measurement list. Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor. Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. Click the Script Editor button to edit the selected script. Properties opens the Measurement Properties - Script dialog. Start runs the measurement list. Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. By default, measurement list files (*.nmlx) are saved to the Configuration files folder. You can save and load measurement lists to/from a file or to/from an FTP server.

Page 206

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To save a measurement list on an FTP server, select Save | Save To FTP Server. Click the FTP Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 338 for more information on the settings. Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The measurement list will be saved in this file.

To load a measurement list from an FTP server, select Load | From FTP Server. If you have not defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server settings are defined, a list of exported measurement list files will appear. Select a file and click Open.

Creating a measurement list: 1.

Page 207

Click the Add New button to add a new measurement.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.

Select a device from the Devices list.

3.

Select a script from the Script File field. You can edit the selected script by clicking the Script Editor button.

4.

Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list.

5.

Select the When all scripts are completed option. Finally, click Start.

6.

The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed.

7.

To save the measurement list, click Save.

6.20.1 Measurement areas ♦

Please note that this feature works only with OpenStreetMap data. Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurements are paused (blocked areas) or allowed to run (trigger areas). Blocked areas are represented as red rectangles or polygons and trigger areas are green rectangles or polygons. To draw and area on the map, select the correct tool for a trigger area or a blocked area and draw the points on the map. To finish drawing, double-click the last point. The areas can be modified with the arrow tool by selecting a point along the edge of the area and clicking on the new location. A list of all defined trigger and blocked areas is displayed on the right-hand side of the dialog. You can remove areas by clicking the X next to the area name. The pause logic and areas work as follows: •

If only trigger areas are defined, measurement is allowed in the trigger areas and other areas are considered to be blocked, i.e. measurement is not allowed. In the example below, measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas. Otherwise measurements will be paused.

•

If only blocked areas are defined, measurement is not allowed in the blocked areas and other areas are considered to be trigger areas, i.e. measurement is allowed. In the example below, measurements will be paused when the test vehicle is in the red areas. Otherwise measurements will be run normally.

Page 208

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

•

If blocked and trigger areas overlap, blocked areas outweigh the trigger areas. In the example below, measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas. Otherwise measurements will be paused.

6.21 Forcing functions Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor interface. In addition to these, some terminals more forcing features that are accessible via the mobile keypad. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on the forcing features available for each terminal.

Page 209

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.21.1 Channel locking You can lock test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement process. Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode, you are actually locking the mobile only to the base station ing that channel at that moment if you make a call. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously, the connection can be established or handed over to another channel but not to another base station. In other words, the channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the channel.

To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel: ♦

Note that when the channel lock is activated, the Neighbor Stations window displays only Serving Cell values. 1. When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the Measurement settings button

in the Devices view and select Channel Locking. You

can also select Measurement | <device name> | Channel Locking. The Channel Locking dialog will appear on your screen.

2.

Enter the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits (it must be a valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. The button will remain pushed down indicating that channel lock is activated. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated.

Page 210

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

3.

Click the Unlock button in the Forcing Functions | Channel Locking dialog to release the channel lock or select a new channel.

6.21.2 Band locking You can use band locking if you want to compare how the network functions with different bands and systems. Using the Band Locking dialog, you can force the mobile to use certain bands or system(s). You can open the Band Locking dialog by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button

Page 211

in the Devices view and choosing Band Locking.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Choose the band(s) or system(s) from the list and click the Lock button. This will lock the mobile to the band/system you have chosen. Click Close to exit the dialog. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. To release the band lock, open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button.

6.21.3 Network selection With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to manually and de to and from a mobile network. Click the Measurement Settings button in the Devices view and select Network Selection.

The , De, and Scan functions are available only when the device is in detached mode.

Page 212

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Select Manual, type in a PLMN ID, and click to to a specific network. If you select Automatic, the device will automatically select the network. ♦

Note that if the device is ed to a network, it is recommended to de the device before ing to another network. Especially when switching between operators. Also note that all NMR devices have mobile data enabled and the devices are attached to a network so they need to be deed. Click the Scan button to scan for available networks. Note that the scanning may take several minutes and it cannot be canceled. Select a network from the list by double-clicking the network name and click . From the Device Status view you can observe the status of the device. To switch back to Automatic mode, select Automatic and click .

6.21.4 Handover control ♦

This functionality is available only with certain Nokia terminals. Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. You do not have to wait for the mobile to make handovers, as you can, for example, force a handover to every neighbor cell. Start a measurement and initiate a call (Measurement control button Open the Handover Control dialog (Measurement settings button

| Start Voice Call). | Handover Control).

Define the channel and handover type and click OK.

The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force the handover to. The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell.

Page 213

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The has three mode request commands, Normal mode, Handover forcing and Handover suppression. If the terminal accepts the command made by the , the corresponding button will indicate this. If the command fails, the is notified. It is also possible to send the same command several times without clicking other commands (i.e. send a new Handover Forcing command with different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. code, or in GSM to a different channel without first deactivating HO forcing). For example, the device can be forced to scrambling code 6. Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6, the can set a new target cell and press the Handover forcing button again. The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the to define 3G offsets, i.e. enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RS, and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RS) During Normal mode, forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers normally.

The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is GSM or WCDMA. When the serving system is GSM, the target cell and non-target cell settings are disabled. In case the current serving system is GSM, but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA, band locking can be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA.

Page 214

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the , handover mode can be changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Handover forcing is done by biasing target and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RS values. Therefore it is also possible to bias the current active cell. For example, in the example below active set includes only one scrambling code. By pressing the Handover forcing button, the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0 and RS values as set by the . When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the terminal reports unbiased values.

In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification, the terminal active set includes scrambling code 63 with Ec/N0 value -7.6dB shown as a brown curve. Scrambling code 6 and 255 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green. Scrambling code 6 is selected to be a target cell.

Page 215

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Once the button is pressed, scrambling code number 6 is added to active set with Ec/N0 value 4.7dB. Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. Scrambling code 6 is seen with Ec/N0 value -18.2dB (brown) and scrambling code 255 (green) is removed from the monitored set.

This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled. The device sends measurement reports to the network with biased values.

Once the mode is changed back to normal, the terminal starts reporting unbiased values.

Page 216

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

When the Handover suppression button is pressed, the terminal is not allowed to do handovers to other cells. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA. Biasing/ measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. You can use this feature, for example, to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place when driving away from a base station.

♦

Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to another. See chapter Making script files.

Page 217

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Page 218

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.21.5 Cell barring ♦

This functionality is available for Nokia 2G, Motorola 3G, and HiSilicon-based LTE terminals.

During the measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all end s (Accept), all cells; that is, also cells that are barred (Ignore), and only barred cells (Reverse). The Cell Barring dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button

in the Devices view and choosing Cell Barring. You can also select

Measurement | <device name> | Cell Barring.

6.21.6 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode) It is possible to set the terminal radio on and off by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button

in the Devices view and selecting Set Terminal Radio

On/Off. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Set Terminal Radio On/Off. The Device Status view will display a red indicator when the terminal radio is off.

Page 219

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.21.7 AMR codec forcing ♦

This feature is available with Qualcomm-based devices. It is possible to force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For example, when a UE is forced to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps.. The codecs are enabled/disabled from the Measurement Properties – Measurement page.

6.22 Cell testing The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are locked to a cell at a time. The Cell Testing dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button

in the Devices view and choosing Cell Testing. You can

also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Testing.

Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. During the call the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. This is necessary since if the cell from which the cell testing is performed is a strong one, without this call the neighbour list may remain empty.

Page 220

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Test cases defines whether the wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both by selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. If the selects both, the test starts with a voice connection attempt, and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP context with the cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. For example, if Voice call is selected, no Packet call settings are displayed RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell, only cells stronger than the value defined here will be included in the test Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell, only cells that are stronger than this value will be included in the test Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made in the test Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a cell if no voice connection is formed. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell or to packet call testing Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for the packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing. The Test results page shows the progress of the test. The green color indicates successful attempts, and the number the number of attempts.

6.23 Missing Neighbor Detection Real‐time missing neighbor detection can be performed with the possibility to detect both GSM/WCDMA and CDMA missing neighbors at the same time. Missing neighbor measurements are also ed on some Nokia terminals. You have three options in which to perform missing neighbor detection:

Page 221

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

•

with a mobile terminal ing missing neighbor detection

•

a scanner

•

a scanner and a mobile

Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-system cells. A terminal sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list, whereas a scanner measures all available cells. Missing neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the neighbor list of the mobile. Hence, a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the neighbor list of the mobile at a given time, but is detected/measured by the scanner. In mobile only missing neighbor measurements, the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors through the missing neighbor detection functionality.

6.23.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile 1. 2.

Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor. In the Devices view, select the device and click the Measurement control button

.

Select Frequency Scanning Properties. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection in the Frequency scanning view. Next, click on Select Channels.

♦

Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to be selected and Top-N option deselected.

Page 222

3.

Select the channels for scanning in the Select Channels dialog.

4.

Click OK and OK.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

5.

Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already, and select Measurement control

| Start Single Shot Scanning or Start

Continuous Scanning.

6.

Once the selected scans have been performed, Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning results to the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports possible detected missing neighbors.

6.23.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile You will need a scanner or a scanner and a mobile. If you are performing missing neighbor detection with a scanner only, the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM Layer 3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding. Note that missing neighbor detection using a scanner only is not available for CDMA/EVDO. A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor list. Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and, based on the data, reports the neighbor channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list. You can observe the missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters, such as, difference to strongest, Ec/N0, and RS related to the missing neighbors. Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. Configure the devices so that they are measuring the same frequency and channels. From Measurement | <device name>, select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog. The field displays the scanner(s) used. The can also set a minimum RX level threshold for missing neighbor. If the measured RX level is below the threshold, the channel is not detected as a missing neighbor. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection.

Page 223

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In GSM Missing Neighbor detection, the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. However, note that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection results.

Page 224

•

Number of missing neighbors: Max. 32, default 3.

•

RX level: -50- -110dBm, default -95dBm

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Open a bar graph, for example, with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New, click the New Layer button

and select the parameter in the Y box). The bar graph with the

selected parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s).

6.24 Pilot pollution analysis Available for UMTS, CDMA and EVDO networks, Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. In a pilot pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure, or there is no clear dominance for any pilots in the area. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells in the network from one another. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT events, and analysis is always active. The can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor’s UI. Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias match. Right-click on the device in the Devices view and select Pilot Pollution Analysis.

The can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor interface.

Page 225

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB. Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -12dB. RS active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RS value is above -95dBm. RS (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RS value is above -95dBm Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to 6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/N0 value. Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to -6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/I0 value. Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are within the -defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. The pilot count includes active and monitored sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the -defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. Pilot count threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are within the -defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot count includes active and neighbor sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the -defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button

.

6.24.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called ”CELLPOLLUTION”. The event includes the following information:

♦

•

Source system

•

Source band

•

Source channel number

•

Pilot pollution scrambling code

•

Pilot pollution Ec/N0

•

Pilot pollution RS

•

Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

•

Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

NOTE! Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at the moment.

Page 226

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events.

Page 227

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.24.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements •

Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB

•

Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

6.24.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called ”CELLPOLLUTION”. The event includes the following information:

Page 228

•

Source system

•

Source band

•

Source channel number

•

Pilot pollution scrambling code

•

Pilot pollution Ec/I0

•

Pilot pollution RS

•

Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

•

Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

♦

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events.

6.24.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners •

Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB

•

Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

6.25 GSM interference analysis In GSM mobile communication networks, system capacity is often limited by co-channel interference. This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency, or adjacent channel interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell used by a terminal. The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved at a minimum C/I margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference, and that the margin is -9 dB C/I for adjacent channel interference with voice. With packet switched data connection C/I margin should be much higher. Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel, or it can be also from out of band in some circumstances. ETSI 05.05 requirements for the interference rejection are:

Page 229

•

Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB

•

200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB

•

400 kHz adjacent channel: z = -41dB

•

600 kHz adjacent channel: z = -49dB

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and playback with Nemo Outdoor. The must enable interference analysis similarly, as with, e.g. missing neighbor detection. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM scanner measurements and these measurements are combined together. GSM terminal continuously reports RX level, RX quality and C/I values. With RX level and RX quality, the sub values are used to make correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used. In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH channel. A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference situation. Once triggering is done, the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured also by a scanning receiver. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode BSIC information. Power of adjacent channels are (+/ - 1) is also measured by the scanning receiver. It should be noted that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode. Due to this limit interference analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test terminals. During dedicated mode, RX level sub, RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed. C/I value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. For example, when AMR speech codec is used, the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to the network. During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. Please note that all test terminals do not report C/I value. Triggering points in dedicated mode are: •

RX level sub and RX quality sub, OR RX level sub and C/I

These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger interference analysis. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available, or BCCH if no TCH channel data is found. If frequency hopping is used, C/I average value is used. The can define triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor interface. Default values are: •

RX Level Sub is above or equal -defined threshold (default value -90 dBm)

•

RX Quality Sub is above or equal defined threshold (default value 4)

•

Channel average C/I is below or equal defined threshold (default value 10 dB)

The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:

Page 230

•

Terminal serving channel number

•

or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping

•

Cell ID

•

RX level sub

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

•

RX quality sub

•

C/I if available

For each terminal serving channel number X, the following data is extracted from scanner measurements and written to terminal measurement file: •

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel X

•

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1)

•

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1)

Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views, for example, in a table grid and bar graph. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells can be seen during the measurement and playback. Nemo Outdoor includes two predefined custom windows for GSM interference analysis. Table grid and bar graph.

6.26 Band scan With the Nemo FSR1 scanner you can perform band scanning. All specified channels are scanned for the selected band and technology and the strongest measured identifiers (CDMA PN, EVDO PN, WCDMA SC, LTE Cell ID) for every valid channel of that technology type are reported. Signal strength and signal quality are reported for each identified channel. This feature is useful in areas where broadcasted technologies and bands are unknown.

Page 231

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To start a band scan, right click the Nemo FSR1 item in the Devices view and select Band Scan.

Available technologies and bands ed by the scanner are shown under Scan settings. Please note that only licensed technologies (systems) are shown. Select the technologies and bands that you want to be scanned and define the threshold levels for the parameters available. Finally press the Start Scan button. With the default threshold values it takes approximately two minutes and 30 seconds to scan GSM 900, 1800 and WCDMA 2100 bands. The scanning rate can be increased by adjusting the threshold values.

Page 232

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Scanning results are displayed on the Scan results page. It is possible to save the results to a text file (.csv).

Page 233

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.27 Timeslot testing ♦

This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only. With Nemo Outdoor, it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel. Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration dialog will be opened.

Phone Number Used for Testing defines the test call number. This must be a valid number. Run Test Until Completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested. ♦

Note that if you select the Run Test Until Completed option, the test may continue indefinitely. Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test. The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last.

Page 234

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test. Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and therefore cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the … button to enter the Select Channel dialog.

Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.

On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. Selecting timeslots will exclude them from the test, for example, in the case they are already reserved for data testing. Green color indicates channels and their timeslots that have been called, and the number in the slot the number of calls made in the timeslot. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the selected channel and their timeslots. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was accessed during the previous call. Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. This happens, for example, if the stops the testing. The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far. Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test. When there are no more white slots left, i.e. all time slots except for the ones that were excluded from the test by selecting them (grey), the measurement will stop on its own.

Page 235

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28 Viewing graphs There are several types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor. There are some pre-made custom windows of each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. See chapter Custom windows for opening custom windows. To open an empty graph, select Data | [graph type] | New. It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Move your mouse pointer on top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will display more information about that particular parameter.

Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameter tree. After this, right-click on the wanted parameter from the parameter tree and select the graph type in which you want the parameter to be opened.

The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next.

Page 236

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.1 Graph popup menu Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the graph.

6.28.1.1

Custom Window Properties dialog

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Page 237

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.1.2

Save custom window changes

Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

6.28.1.3

Save as new custom window

Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups.

6.28.1.4

Save as image

Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

6.28.1.5

Move view to

With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See chapter View groups for more information on view groups.

6.28.1.6

Graph Properties dialog

Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph Properties dialog. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button

. Please

note that the contents of this dialog varies depending on the graph type (line, bar, scatter, spectrum).

Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above the bar in the graph. Value label placement defines wether the value is displayed on top of the bar or on the bar. Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. If you select Default, the axis changes depending on the active layer. You can also define different parameters for the axes. This is especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales. Automatic bar scale option is available for bar graphs. When the option is set to Yes, the X-scale automatically scales to the displayed data. Select Yes in the Hide s in full screen mode if you want s to disappear once you enter full screen mode.

Page 238

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.1.7

Edit Parameters dialog

By selecting the Edit Parameters item in the menu you will enter the Edit Parameters dialog. Select parameters in the Parameters tree and move them to the editing table with the right arrow button

. Remove a parameter from the table by selecting it and clicking the left arrow button

You can also quickly find parameters through the filter field. Use the up

and down

arrow

buttons to move the parameters in the editing field.

The parameters will be shown in the Values view in the Graph side . This functionality is particularly useful for viewing textual parameters.

6.28.1.8

Side

Right-click on a graph window and choose Side from the popup menu. You can also open it by clicking the Side dialog button

6.28.1.8.1

.

Layers

Select Layers in the popup menu to view the Layers view in the graph side .

6.28.1.8.2

Values

Select Values in the popup menu to view the Values view in the graph side .

Page 239

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.1.9

Full screen

Selecting the Full screen item in the popup menu will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

6.28.2 Zoom - Scatter graph To zoom in on a scatter graph, drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot towards the corners with the red dots. To zoom out, do the same in reverse, dragging the mouse from a red dot to a green dot.

Page 240

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.3 Graph side - Layers

The layers can be dragged and dropped on some toolbar buttons. For example, a layer can be dragged and dropped on the Remove layer button

to remove the layer. The order of the layers

can also be changed by dragging them with the mouse.

The layer is now removed.

To create space in the graph side , you can also click on the X button in the right-hand corner of the Layers view. To reopen the view, right-click on the graph and select Layers in the popup menu. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view.

Page 241

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.

Page 242

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.3.1

Grouping layers

The New Group, Rename Group, Remove Group, Move Group Up, Move Group Down and Group Similar Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. Layer groups can be used to group parameters with the same unit and scale. Parameters in the same group will be displayed in the same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph.

The Layers view displays all parameters added in the graph.

Page 243

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Righ-click on the view and select Group Similar Layers.

The parameters will be organized into groups based on the parameter unit.

Page 244

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Groups can be removed, renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group and drag and drop parameters into the group.

6.28.3.2

New layer

The New Layer command creates a new layer.

Select a parameter in the Y or X field. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group. Define the layer properties, such as, line style and color. See chapter Layer Properties for more detailed information. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog.

Page 245

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.3.3

Hide layer

The Hide Layer button

6.28.3.4

hides the selected layer.

Remove layer

The Remove Layer button

6.28.3.5

removes the selected layer.

Layer Properties dialog

Click on the Layer Properties

icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. The dialog can also be

accessed by double-clicking a layer in the . The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit the selected layer.

Line width defines the line thickness in pixels. Show extended values list displays more detailed information about the parameter. Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs" appearance) or one straight line. Sort(Y): for data sorting based on y-value in bar graph. Data can be sorted based on descending or ascending order. Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled. Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque, 100 = totally transparent). Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line. There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic (algorithmic) or fixed color set, or whether a color set based on parameter values is used (see chapter Graph layer color configuration).

Page 246

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Window size defines the number of values to be averaged. Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based on the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen. Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the , so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed. Note that if you want to select No in the drop-down menu, Automatic scale also needs to be set to No. Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale, if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic scale is set to Yes, this is not used Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic scale is set to Yes, this is not used. Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the defined limits for a measurement result is set. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes below or above the minimum and maximum values. Depending on the parameter, it is possible to define various filters: •

Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, no filtering is used

•

Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, appropriate filtering is not used so that it is possible to filter only channels, only pilots or both

•

Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or f3 or…); if the list is empty, no filtering is used

•

TopN: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter. If 0, no filtering is used

•

TopN(Y): for best TOP-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. E.g., only the best two values can be seen in the line or bar graph

•

BottomN(y): This can be done by selecting number of topN and select sorting order. E.g., below bottom three RX levels are shown.

Some of the graph types data tips. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar. The data tip will display information from that point of time. Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. Such parameters are, for example, RACH TX Power, RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count. Such graphs include also the following layer properties. Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to display the instantaneous values in the graph Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency.

6.28.3.6

Arrow down/up

The Arrow Down

and Arrow Up

icons will move the selected layer up or down in the graph

. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view with the mouse.

Page 247

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.3.7

Layer device selection

The Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Layers can be reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The Device Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead of using layer properties dialog for each layer separately.

6.28.4 Graph side – Values and parameter The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. Select a layer in the Layers view, and double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.

If a given parameter value consists of more than one value, a separate parameter window, an extended values list, appears.

Page 248

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the example above, the Parameters view is organized into tabs to view more than one parameter and its values. In this example the Ec/N0 (active) parameter is selected. You can also drag and drop the Values and Parameter views inside, beside, above or below each other. For example, in the example below the parameter view is embedded in the Values view.

In the example below all views are separate. By clicking the maximize icon hand corner of a view it is possible to maximize the view. Click the exit icon

at the upper rightat the top to close

the view. You can reopen the view by right-clicking on the graph and selecting Values.

By right-clicking on the Values view, you can access the Edit Parameters dialog.

Page 249

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.5 Graph layer color configuration Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs, and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or parameters, as different colors can be assigned e.g., to different channels, scrambling codes, cell ID, etc. First, add parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree. Next, double-click on a layer in the Layers side to enter the Layer Properties dialog.

If you select the Classic (algorithmic) option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color automatically.

Page 250

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

If you choose Fixed color, click … to enter the Colors dialog. Define the fixed color by selecting it in the Standard or Custom page, or define the RGB for the color. Click OK. The graph will be colored based on the fixed color you selected.

Page 251

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter and Color set fields.

Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set parameter menu. To edit the color set in question, click on Edit Color Set.. button. It will lead you to the Color Set Properties dialog. Here you can edit the color set selected. See chapter Color Set Editor for more information.

The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph.

Page 252

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. Each BSIC is presented with its own color; the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.

Similarly, the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC numbers. All channels with BSIC information appear in green color, and channels without BSIC information are shown with black color.

Page 253

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers.

6.28.6 Spectrum graphs Spectrum graphs are useful for displaying spectrum scanning results. By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window, it is possible to see the RX level for certain frequencies shown on the side . Markers can be also edited, added or removed via edit marker window.

Page 254

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

With the peak value indicator tool you can visualize the peak value of the selected parameter for each frequency. Open the Layer Properties dialog and select Yes in the Draw peak line field.

The peak value line will be drawn with the selected color. In the image below, the peak line is drawn in red. To reset the peak line, right-click on the graph and select Reset Peak Lines.

Page 255

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.28.7 Color grid graphs Color grid graphs can be used for visualizing data as a two-dimensional color grid where the X-axis represents time and the Y-axis represents the identifier of the value to be plotted (channel, cell, etc.). The Y-axis scale is configurable. Color of the cell in the X/Y position represents the value. Color grid graphs are especially useful for displaying scanner data.

6.28.8 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph In the bar below, graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the top and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. For example, in the example below three percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI value 3 has been used for antenna port 1. Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify used CQI type. CQI type A is shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red.

Page 256

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed, it can be seen from the HSDPA link adaptation information table grid. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last sample duration which is set to 200ms. E.g., four percentage of the time during the sample duration modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits and for the second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits.

6.29 Viewing grids Along with the graph windows, the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement events, such as statistics from the current measurement, QoS parameters, Layer2 and Layer 3 messages (the selection depends on the technology measured), and packet capture data. All events can be decoded by double-clicking on the event row. The decoded message is displayed in a separate window. Alternatively, you can right-click on an event row and from the popup menu select Decode Message. To open several decoded message windows, select Decode Message in New Window option. To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding function in Device Settings

Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to

performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. This requires Microsoft Network Monitor to be installed. Please see chapter IP packet capturing for more information. An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data | [Grid Type] | New. If you select one of the ready-made custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor, you need to select which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to View dialog. In most grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. Open several grid windows to view multiple devices at the same time. However, in the Parameters grids you can view several devices simultaneously as separate columns.

Page 257

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. Click on the parameter and drag it in the grid. It will be added there.

6.29.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its decoded message. Select the grid view, press Ctrl + F, and type the search string in the Search string field in the Find dialog. Depending on whether Up or Down direction is selected in the Direction field, the event next in the time sequence will be highlighted in the grid.

6.29.2 Grid popup menu Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the grid. Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type.

Page 258

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.29.2.1

Page 259

Custom Window Properties dialog

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

6.29.2.2

Save custom window changes

Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

6.29.2.3

Save as new custom window

With Save As New Custom Window you can save a new custom window. Selecting this item will open the Custom Window Properties dialog.

6.29.2.4

Move view to

With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See chapter View groups for more information on view groups.

6.29.2.5

Automatic scrolling

Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement progresses.

6.29.2.6

Add/remove separator

In Parameters grids you can add empty lines (separators) to make the view easier to read. Select Remove Separator to delete an empty line from the grid.

6.29.2.7

Open

Open allows you to open the selected parameter or statistic in another view (line graph, table grid, map, etc.). This item is available only with parameters and statistics grids.

6.29.2.8

Grid color configuration in events grids

To make grids more clear, you can colorize certain events in a grid based on the event name or event ID. Right-click on a grid, and select Configure Colors from the popup menu, or click on the Configure Colors button in the Grid Properties dialog. The Grid Color Configuration dialog is opened. ♦

Note that not all events and parameters are available with all devices. In the events Grid Color Configuration dialog select the Event name column. You can set a text color and/or a background color for the selected events. If you want to colorize the background, select Call events (Event name) in the Background Color Set field and select (none) in the Text Color Set field. Alternatively, if you want to colorize only the text in the grid, select Call Events (Event name) in the Text Color Set field from the drop-down menu and select (none) in the Background Color Set field, as in the example below. Note that the contents of the Grid Color Configuration dialog depend on which columns have been selected in the Grid Properties dialog.

Page 260

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Make sure that the color set type is string. Here you can also add more strings to the color set through Add…

Page 261

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the string in the Text field and select the color code for it. If you want, you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field.

Click OK in the String Properties and Color Set Properties dialogs. Finally, click OK in the Grid Color Configuration dialog. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. Each color corresponds to a certain type of event, defined in the Color Set Properties dialog.

Page 262

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.29.2.9

Grid color configuration based on decoded message in grids

Messages and Events grids can be color-coded based on a string in a message’s decoded message. In this case, you need to create a new color set in the Color Set Editor. It is possible to color-code both the text in the grid and the background color. While you can choose to colorize only one of them, it is also possible to color-code both text and background. For example, you can have a message appear in white text and blue background color. However, in that case to create two new color sets for the same string, for example, Decoded Text_1 and Decoded Text_2. Below you will see an example of how to create a color set and set it for the background color. Click Add…

Page 263

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the Color Set Properties dialog type, for example, Decoded Text in the Name field. You can also create a short name for the new color set, or write a description for it. Select string as the color set type. Click Add… In the String Properties dialog type in the string which will determine the messages to be colored with the new color set.

Page 264

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Click OK, and Close in the Color Set Editor.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. You can colorize the text color in the grid and/or the background color. If you want to colorize only the text, select the new color set created above, Decoded Text, in the Text Color Set field and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. In this example the background will be color-coded, so (none) is selected in the Text Color Set field, and Decoded Text in the Background Color Set field. Click OK.

Page 265

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be color-coded with the Decoded text color set.

6.29.2.10

Grid color configuration in events grids based on message name

Messages in Events grids can also be color-coded based on the message name. You can color-code the message text or the background color, or both. Color-coding a message based on its name is done in the same way as color-coding a message based on a specific string in its decoded message. However, when creating the new color set in the Color Set Editor | Color Set Properties | String Properties, you need to type the name of the message you want to color-code instead of the string in the decoded message. Below you will see an example of two color sets made for the same message name. Further, both the message text and background will be colorized. Click OK.

Also click OK in the Color Set Properties and Color Set Editor dialogs.

Page 266

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Page 267

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Next, right-click on the messages grid and select Configure Colors, or select Configure Colors in the Grid Properties dialog. Select Message_2 in the Text Color Set field and Message in the Background Color Set field. Click OK.

All messages called SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH will be color-coded with the new color sets.

Page 268

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.29.2.11

Grid color configuration for parameter grids

Grids can be made clearer through colors. Open a parameters grid from Data | Parameters Grid.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click Use Defaults if no default color sets are shown in the Color Set field. The Clear All button inactivates the default color sets. Note that not all parameters have default color sets assigned to them. You can choose a color set for a selected parameter in the Text Color Set and Background Color Set drop-down menus depending on whether you want to color the text/values or the background of the text/values in the grid. If you want to set a color set for both text and color for the same parameter, note that you need to use two different color sets for it.

Page 269

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

You can also edit the default color sets by selecting a color set and clicking Edit… In the Color Set Properties dialog you can change the default settings to the color set.

Page 270

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Parameters with assigned color sets are colorized according to their value. In the example below a background of the parameter values has been color-coded. Click OK twice to exit the Grid Color Configuration dialog.

6.29.2.12

Grid color configuration for table grids

Table grids have default color sets assigned to them. Go to Data | Table Grid | New. In the Grid Properties dialog select a device and a parameter set to be viewed in the table grid. Click OK.

Page 271

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The parameters are colorized according to their default color sets. You can also edit the default color sets. Right-click on the grid, select Configure Colors… the parameter you wish to edit, and Edit… The Color Set Properties dialog appears where you can change the color set settings. Click OK to exit the dialogs and go back to the table grid.

You can also view cell name information for missing neighbors when a scanner and a mobile are used simultaneously.

6.29.2.13

Configure filters/quick filters

Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters. By using filters, only the selected messages will be displayed. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the popup menu

Page 272

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened.

Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. Select the Hiding all option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. If you would like to view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others, select hiding all lines. If you would like to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others, select showing all lines. You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus

button. A conditional row appears

giving you options based on which the grid filtering takes place.

Page 273

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

It is possible to set filtering rules for message name, subchannel and decoded text. In addition, you can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the Other Parameter… item in the filter target popup menu.

The contents of the condition menu vary depending on which item in the filter target menu is selected.

Note also that a separate, independent condition needs to be added from the plus icon

at the top

left-hand corner of the dialog. If a condition has two or more constituents, the plus icon

next to

the first constituent needs to be clicked. In this case the conditions are indented and combined with one another with the text and if, and both conditions need to be met for the filtering to take place.

Page 274

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the example above, a line is filtered out if a message contains a missing neighbor ec/n0 value that is less than -5. The second filtering rule states that if a message name contains the text SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH and if a message contains SysInfoType18, the message is filtered out from the grid. The minus icon

removes a row next to it from the list. Alternatively, you can delete all filters by

right-clicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu. The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. Right-click on a row in the grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu.

You can now quickly define a filter for the selected layer message. You can choose to hide the respective message and all similar messages either according to the Event (Hide this Event), subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text (Hide This Message). All messages with the selected event, subchannel name or message text will be hidden. In the same way, you can choose to display messages of the selected type only. Select Remove All Filters to delete all filter rules. When filtering is enabled, the text Filtering will appear in the title bar.

6.29.2.14

Create notification

Select the Create Notification item to create a new notification matching the selected event. For more information, see chapter Notification Configuration.

6.29.2.15

Decode message

This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. You can also decode messages by double-clicking on the message row. In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message Message

grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. If you move forward or

back in the message decoding grid, use the Go to Message message in the messages grid. Click the Copy to Clipboard message decoding grid as text to clipboard.

Page 275

and Show Previous

button to move to the same button to copy the contents of the

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS), it is also possible to arrange the contents of the decoded message in three different ways. The Format as list

arranges the contents of a grid’s measurement results in a list. The Format

as horizontal table

arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns, and

the Format as vertical table

arranges the contents in a vertical table. The search field in the

decoded text window enables the to find a string in the decoded message window.

Select a string of text in the decoded text, right-click on it and select Copy to copy the selected text as text to the clipboard. If no text is selected in the decoded text window, all text in it will be copied. This is the same as the Copy to Clipboard

Page 276

functionality.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.29.2.16

Decode message in new window

This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time.

6.29.2.17

Automatic decode

The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or latest message in decoded form.

6.29.2.18

Save - Grid

The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.txt). If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is saved in a text file. You can also save the entire grid window as an image file (.jpg). From Events grids, you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-File or into a CSV file.

6.29.2.19

MapInfo Tab-file export

You can export measurement data into a MapInfo .tab file. In an Events grid, select Save | MapInfo Tab-File. See chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information.

6.29.2.20

CSV file export

You can export measurement data into a CSV file. In an Events grid, select Save | CSV File.

The exporting is ed for a single file, and the column separator can be a comma, semicolon, tab or space. The file(s) can be opened with third-party applications. Indoor files are not ed at the moment. The can select all events or only specific events from the grid for export.

Page 277

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.29.2.21

Copy

The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as text or as decoded text. If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is copied on the clipboard. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another application. Select All Through the Select All item you can select all events in an Events grid. This presents an easy and quick way to select all lines, for example, to be exported.

6.29.2.22

Find

The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.

Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. Define if the search results should match case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. You can also limit the search to decoded messages only. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one. To move down to the next match, press F3. To move up to the next match, press Shift+F3.

The search field in the decoded text window enables the to find a string in the decoded message window.

Page 278

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Below you will see a list of commands for the decoded text view. Ctrl + Shift + F = Go to search field in decoded text view Enter = Highlight next match in decoded text view (when search field is focused) Shift + Enter = Highlight previous match in decoded text view (when search field is focused) Esc = Clear search field in decoded text view (when search field is focused) Full Screen The Full Screen item enables you to view Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

6.29.2.23

Grid Properties dialog

Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. The Grid Properties dialog is opened. ♦

Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the grid type and on the measurement device.

Page 279

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

You can select events, parameters, and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. The available parameters/events are organized by technology and call mode in the All tab. If you select, for example, the UMTS option, all the parameters/events under UMTS are selected. You can also select individual parameters/events. Move your mouse pointer on top of a parameter/event, and the tooltip will display more information about that particular parameter/event. In the Selected tab you can view which parameters/events you have selected and change their order using the arrow buttons.

Page 280

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.29.2.24

parameters

The Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Status window. Click the Parameters button in the Parameters dialog to access the Layer Parameters dialog.

Click the Add button to define new parameters.

Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be decoded. Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages, for example, Ordered MS power level. Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched.

Page 281

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

After you have defined all the parameters, click OK. The new parameter is added to the list in the Layer Parameters dialog. Click OK to exit the dialog. In the Parameters dialog, expand the Parameters item. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK.

The list of parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters.xml. Parameters can be searched in messages grids. The can also perform more complex searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. It is possible, for example, to search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message.

It is possible to export and import parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor. See chapter Export/import settings for more information.

6.30 Viewing maps Nemo Outdoor s two types of outdoor maps: MapX and OpenStreetMap maps. Most of the functions are the same for both types but there are some differences. ♦

Please note that in order to use OpenStreetMap maps, the computer needs to be connected to the Internet or OpenStreetMap data must be ed on the computer.

Page 282

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Open a map by selecting Data | Map | New MapX or New OpenStreetMap. If you open a new MapX map, Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map field in the Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab. If you open an OpenStreetMap map, the view will center on your current location. The map window specific commands can be accessed through toolbar buttons as well as from the popup menu when right-clicking on the map. See chapter Map toolbar buttons for a description of the Nemo Outdoor map toolbar buttons. ♦

Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. For information on Indoor measurements, refer to chapter Viewing indoor maps.

It is possible to view selected parameters on a map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the map. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down menu.

If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system, the current location of the test vehicle will be displayed on the map as a circle on the route. If there is no GPS connected to the system, you can define the current location manually with the Set Current Location tool

(the button is

activated when recording is started). A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all location-specific data, such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location. You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map.

Page 283

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

While viewing notifications on a map, hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip with information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number.

6.30.1 Base stations on a map If you select a BTS file (.nbf or .csv) for the measurement file, the base stations will be displayed. A line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. Also, the distance to the serving base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window. ♦

Note that the BTS file is displayed only if a device is associated with the BTS file (BTS Properties – Connected devices). The BTS icons display the antennas, the channel numbers for the antennas, and directions that the antennas point to. The antennas are drawn in one degree steps. Hover your mouse over the base station icon to see more information about the BTS.

♦

Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS, the BTS name will be truncated with “…” In this case, click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells.

Page 284

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.1.1

Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor

It is possible to edit the locations of base station icons directly in Nemo Outdoor. Open a BTS file on a map. Right-click on a BTS icon and select Move. Then click on the new location and the BTS icon is moved there. You can also remove BTS sites from the BTS file. The changes are saved in the BTS file when you exit Nemo Outdoor.

Right-click on a BTS icon and select Edit or right-click on the map and select Add Site. In the BTS Editor you can edit the site and cell information. You can also add new sites, cells, and neighbor cells by clicking the Add button.

For sites, you must define the following information: site name, longitude, and latitude.

Page 285

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Under sites you have cells. For cells there are some mandatory and optional settings.

The settings below are mandatory. System defines in which cellular system the cell belongs. Cell name defines a unique name for the cell. Antenna direction defines the direction of the antenna in degrees. Channel number defines the channel number. Cell ID/Cell ID 16-bit defines a unique cell ID for the cell. Radio network controller ID defines a unique radio network controller ID for the cell. Scrambling code defines a unique scrambling code for the cell. The settings below are optional. Antenna height defines the height of the antenna from the ground in meters. Antenna tilt defines the angle of the main beam of the antenna relative to the horizontal plane. Antenna beam width defines the width of the beam in degrees. Cell range defines the range of the cell in kilometers. For Cell type the options are undefined, normal, and repeater. Location area code defines in which location area the cell belongs. Routing area code defines in which routing area the cell belongs. UTRAN registration area defines in which UTRAN registration area the cell belongs.

6.30.2 MapX maps You can customize the MapX map view using the MapX properties. The customized settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later on. MapInfo Workspaces (*.wor file) cannot be directly opened with MapX, but can be saved as a .gst file in MapInfo Professional using the MapInfo MapX Geoset Utility tool (Geoset.mbx) that ships with version 5.x of MapInfo Professional. This file (.gst) can be directly opened by MapX in Nemo Outdoor.

Page 286

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Each MapInfo® raster map has two files: an image file (.tif. .gif, .jpg) and a .tab file When MapInfo raster maps are used, the image file is the actual map image file. The .tab file contains information about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to refer to a particular map. When using vector data for MapInfo®, there are three different files that need to be in the same directory, the .tab, .map, and the .id file. The corresponding image and .tab files for raster maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo® map. If you are using a large map (size over 1 Mb), updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor functions. We recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or 16, or turning the color map to black and white.

6.30.2.1

MapInfo Tab-file export

You can export measurement data into a MapInfo .tab file. In an Events grid, select Save | MapInfo Tab-File. To export a route plan, create a route plan, right-click on the map and select Route Plan | Save as MapInfo Tab-File. The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters or items that can be exported. Select the items that you would like to include in the .tab file. Also define a File name and Layer title for the exported .tab file.

To change the symbol for each parameter, double-click the parameter or select a parameter and click the Change Symbol button. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. In the Symbol Style dialog, you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it. Finally click OK.

Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the .tab file.

Page 287

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.3 Route plans Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement. You can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode, or you can manually create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during playback. In addition, you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in the Waypoints view in the map side . You can save a route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf), and if you have made any changes to the route plan properties in the map window, you can save them as a custom window for later use. The custom window will also contain changes made to the color set or Waypoints views. If you have previously created and saved a route plan (.rpf), you can open it through the Open Route Plan item in the map toolbar

or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Route Plan |

Open from the popup menu. The route plan (.rpf) is now viewed on the map and in the map side , and is ready to be used in a measurement. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one waypoint to the next.

6.30.3.1

Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints

Start Nemo Outdoor with at least one device and a GPS receiver attached to it in online or offline mode. You can select a ready workspace in the Nemo Outdoor Welcome page (see Configuration through Welcome page) as you start Nemo Outdoor and view a map window, or alternatively you can open a map manually from Data | Map. You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint

button in the map

toolbar, or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu, and clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side is also activated. A new route plan (.rpf) appears in the Layers view, and the Waypoints view is enabled. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan map popup menu.

Page 288

icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. The Show next waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during a measurement. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle mode, not during playback. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. If you clear the Show next waypoint option, the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint items will also be disabled. The Waypoint detection radius slider indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is selected. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement, the next waypoint is selected on the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar. The Distance to next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next waypoint from the current position on the route, so the figure decreases as you approach the next waypoint. The Distance from previous waypoint field indicates how many meters it is from the previous waypoint from the current position on the route. With the Next button you can move from one waypoint to the next. You can make changes to the route plan using the buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view.

To select a waypoint on the map, click on the Select button in the Waypoints view, then select a waypoint on the map. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others. In addition, the delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. If you click on Delete, the selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted, and the previous waypoint on the route will automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. If the deleted waypoint was the first waypoint on the route plan, the next waypoint on the route will be selected. Moreover, the Delete button is only enabled with the Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map. Reclick on Select to clear the functionality. You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select, then selecting a specific waypoint on the map. Click on the Move button, and you will be able to move the selected waypoint on the map. The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint. With the Reverse button you can reverse the direction of the route plan.

Page 289

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side is synchronized with the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar. If you click on either button when they are inactive, they will both be activated, and conversely if you click on either button when active, they will become inactive. When you select either, you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan.

6.30.3.2

Creating and saving route plans from a measurement

In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints, you can create a route plan from a measurement. Start Nemo Outdoor, load a measurement file and open a map window. Right-click on the map and select View Entire Route, or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains GPS coordinates. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan

toolbar icon, or select

Route Plan | Create from the map popup menu. The route plan should now be visible on the map, the layer list should have a new layer (“Untitled.rpf”), and the control buttons on the Waypoints view should be enabled. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was created. Save the route plan by clicking the Save Route Plan

item in the toolbar, or by selecting it in the

map popup menu. You can also modify the route plan with the Select, Move, Add and Delete buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side . Note that when you click on Select, you may need to zoom in on the map to view the discrete waypoints. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger circle among all the circles. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints for more information on how to use the control buttons, and on how to read the waypoints on the route plan during a measurement.

6.30.3.3

Saving a route plan to a custom window

When you create a route plan and save it, the actual route plan will be saved as a Route Plan File (.rpf). However, if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific properties, and you want to save these changes, you need to save the map window as a custom window. When you open a measurement the next time, you can open the custom window by rightclicking on the gray space outside the map window, and select Map | [name of custom window]. You will also find the custom window in Data | Map | [name of custom window]. First, create or open a route plan, and save it. Next, double-click on the route plan in the map side to access the Route Plan Properties dialog, change the properties and click OK. Change the settings in the Waypoints view in the side , right-click on the map, and select Save As Custom Window in the map popup menu. Close the map and open the custom window you saved. When you open the properties dialog, the properties should be what you set them to.

Page 290

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4 Map popup menu Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map. Please note that the contents of the menu depend on the map type (MapX or OpenStreetMap).

Page 291

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.1

Custom Window Properties dialog

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

6.30.4.2

Save as new custom window

Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups.

6.30.4.3

Save custom window changes

Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

6.30.4.4

Save as - CSV file

Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.

6.30.4.5

Save as - Image

Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

6.30.4.6

Save as - MapInfo Tab-file

Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

Page 292

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.7

Export to Google Earth

By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route, colors based on selected parameter, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml file which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application.

6.30.4.8

Move view to

With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See chapter View groups for more information on view groups.

6.30.4.9

Open map

By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

6.30.4.10

Save map

By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name.

6.30.4.11

Find map at position

When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item, Nemo Outdoor will view a list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have specified in the View | Interface Properties | Paths dialog. In this way you have the possibility to choose the most appropriate map for your purposes. You can also browse for a suitable map manually by clicking on the Browse button and browsing your local folders.

Page 293

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.12

tiles

With the Tiles tool you can OpenStreetMap data on your computer so you can use the OpenStreetMap maps even when you are not connected to the Internet. ♦

It is recommended to use this method always with OpenStreetMap maps as ing map data in the middle of measurements may affect the results.

Zoom levels defines the number of levels from which map data is ed. The more levels you choose, the more data is ed. Select the Reload existing tiles option to overwrite existing map data. Click the Select Area button to the select an area with your mouse from where map data will be ed.

6.30.4.13

Empty disk cache

Select the Empty Disk Cache option to delete all ed OpenStreetMap data. The tiles open on the map will not be deleted.

6.30.4.14

Route plan - Create

The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window.

6.30.4.15

Route plan - Open

Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map.

6.30.4.16

Route plan - Save

The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

6.30.4.17

Route plan - Save as MapInfo Tab-file

The Save Route Plan as MapInfo Tab-File item will let you save the route plan as a .tab file that can be opened in MapInfo. See chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information.

6.30.4.18

Add waypoint

Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

Page 294

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.19

Tool

Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow. Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel and the + and - keyboard buttons. Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback. Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Note that this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be used during playback.

6.30.4.20

Auto center

The Auto Center tool pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected.

6.30.4.21

Auto clear route

The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is stopped. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement, unselect the tool.

6.30.4.22

Previous view and view entire map

With the Previous View command, you can return to the previous map view, and the View Entire Map command displays the whole map.

6.30.4.23

View entire route

By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able to view the whole route on the map.

6.30.4.24

Scale

The Scale appears in the window when the respective selection is activated.

6.30.4.25

Modify route

With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback. This is especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route, for example, because GPS fix was lost in a tunnel.

Page 295

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Right-click on a map and select Modify Route from the popup menu.

The route will be displayed as dots.

Page 296

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Drag and drop the dots into their new positions. Please note that you should maintain the correct order of the dots. Otherwise the route will appear jagged.

When you have finished modifying the route, right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route tool. The modified route is now displayed in normal mode.

6.30.4.26

Add site

With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.

Page 297

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.27

Textual comments

With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

6.30.4.28

Side s

6.30.4.29

Color legends

The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. If you have loaded a multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map, the color legends will be shown in separate tabs. See chapter Color Set Editor on how to create and edit color sets.

Page 298

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.30

Find cell

With Find Cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter. Below a cell is searched based on its Cell ID number. You can also search for custom data entered in the BTS file header and for neighbor cells.

6.30.4.31

Layers

The Layers side displays a list of items available on the map. They can be BTS files, measurement routes, map layers, route history search results, etc. Double-click an item to access its Properties dialog (see Layer properties). You can hide and display layers by selecting and deselecting the option next to the layer or click the X button to delete the layer. With the buttons you can add new layers on the map.

Page 299

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.32

Measure distance

Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map. Click the Measure Distance button

to activate the tool and click the Add point button. Select the

points on the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map. The Total distance is displayed in the left-hand .

With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two points is used as the radius.

To remove points from the map, click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. To hide the Measure Distance , click the Measure Distance button.

Page 300

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.33

Route history

If the Route History side is not visible, right-click on the map and select Side s | Route History. With the Route History tool you can search for measurements recorded within a specified time frame and plot those measurement routes on a map. This requires that a GPX file has been created for the measurement. Define the folder from where GPX files will be searched and define the time frame. After you click the Search button, Outdoor will search for the GPX files and display the matching routes on the map. The search results will also be displayed as layers. Double-click the route history layer to open the Route History Route Properties dialog where you can edit the route color and thickness.

6.30.4.34

Waypoints

The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create and save a route plan for later use. The Show next waypoint field is only activated when at least one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or offline mode. This functionality is not active during measurement playback. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints for more information.

6.30.4.35

Full screen

Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

Page 301

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.36

Layer properties

The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected in the map side . It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side : the device-specific measurement route layer, the base station layer, and the route plan layer.

6.30.4.37

Route properties

In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.

Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map. Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting point of the measurement route. Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window.

Page 302

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Line thickness defines the thickness of the route in pixels. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. To define a default offset between multi-measurement routes, go to the Indoor Properties dialog. With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors. Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction. The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in pixels. When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement is paused.

Page 303

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with the same color. If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select Yes for Use color set. First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field or select New to create a new color set. Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See chapter Color Set Editor for more information on defining color sets. ♦

Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set. If you are measuring with a scanner, click on Configure Filters to select specific channels, frequencies, or scrambling codes for which the parameter values are displayed.

Page 304

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To filter spectrum scanning results, define the frequency exactly in the same format as it appears in the Spectrum graph.

To select scrambling codes, first select a channel by clicking the Select button under Selected channel numbers. Then select scrambling codes for the selected channel by clicking the Select button under Selected scrambling codes.

If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value.

Page 305

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For example, if the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the system route is not drawn while in GSM.

Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can define the size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.

Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Select a BTS file by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side .

Page 306

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option if you only want to draw a line from active system cell(s) to the test vehicle. Select the Draw only to n strongest neighbor cells option to draw a line to a defined maximum number of strongest neighbors (per system) based on the following parameters: •

GSM: RX Level Sub (if available) or RX Level Full

•

UMTS: Ec/N0

•

CDMA/EVDO: Ec/Io

•

LTE: RSRP

Select the Draw line(s) to detected neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the detected neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that lines to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. If missing neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only, this information is not shown on the map. Instead, the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid. Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that a BTS file must be used with this feature. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output file and due to this reason, the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is used with the terminal.

Page 307

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

By selecting the Show Textual notes option, you will be able to view textual notes on a measurement route in the map window. You can select a text and background color for the note in the Text color and Background color fields. Click OK to exit the Route Properties dialog.

6.30.4.38

BTS Properties dialog

When a base station file is selected in the map side , the BTS Properties dialog appears when Layer Properties is selected in the map popup menu. You can also view the dialog by doubleclicking on the BTS file in the map side .

BTS file refers to the BTS file that is used on the map. If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e.g., UMTS and GSM), select the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the active system, in other words, the system in which the test device is currently. The other base stations are hidden. Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. Note that you define a different color for active system base stations and for other base stations. •

Selected cell color defines a color for a cell that is selected on the map. Neighboring cells are highlighted with the selected color and the selected cell is shown with the same color but with a bolded outline. The tooltip shows neighbor cell names for the selected cell.

•

Page 308

Serving cell color defines a color for the currently serving cell.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base stations through the use of existing and -defined color sets. Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base stations, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu. Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs.

Page 309

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

See chapter Color Set Editor for more information on how to edit and create color sets.

Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell information and define the Text color and Background color.

Page 310

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the example below, all cell information and the Show labels option are selected.

Page 311

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Select the Draw cell range option to view the cell range on the map. Define the degree of cell range transparency in the Cell range transparency.

DAS anomaly analysis can be used to automatically perform /fail analysis for indoor cells. See chapter DAS anomaly analysis for more information.

The Connected devices displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites. Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected.

Page 312

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.39

Route Plan Properties dialog

When a route plan is selected in the side and you right-click on the map and select Layer Properties, the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. You can also view the dialog by doubleclicking on the route plan in the map side .

Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side . The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line attaching the icons together. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions.

6.30.4.40

Map Properties dialog

In the Map Properties dialog you can define the offset (in pixels) between routes on a map. This value is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset, would overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset values for individual routes, go to the Route properties dialog and define the X and Y offset values.

Page 313

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.4.41

MapX Properties dialog

Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open Map button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.

If you are using MapInfo® maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the table shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position layer is under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the layer from the list and click the Remove button.

Page 314

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.5 Color Set Editor You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route Properties | Color dialog. You can also access the Color Set Editor by selecting View | Color Set Editor.., or by double-clicking Color sets in the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+ M). With the Color Set Editor you can define and name color sets to be used in maps and grids. In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. You can sort the color sets by selecting the Type. You can also search for a color set by its name. To edit an existing color set, double-click on the color set.

Page 315

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set.

Name and Short name identify the color set. You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field. Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with, numerical, gradient, string, or automatic. T The Groups and Type settings can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog. With the Automatically generate missing values option you can specify colors for some fixed values while the rest are automatically generated. This option can be used with numerical or string type of colorset. This is especially useful with parameters with many values (e.g. PNs and scr. code). Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them.

Page 316

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. In the Range Properties dialog, select the color and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. You can also write a description for the value range. Finally click OK.

Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. In the Add Range dialog, define the top and bottom values and the step, i.e., how many values are represented by the same color. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the parameter values.

Page 317

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.6 Map example 1 In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the Active set size color set. In the Route Properties | Route dialog, Color page, select Number of TBF-s Uplink in the Parameter field, and Active set size in the Color Set field, and click OK. The Color Legend in the map side displays the color codes for the Active set size values.

Page 318

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.7 Map example 2 In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the TX Power color set. In the Measurement's Route Properties dialog, Color page, select TX Power in the Parameter and Color Set fields and click OK. The Color Legend in the map side displays the color codes for the TX Power values. In this color set, green means a low TX Power level and red a high level.

Page 319

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.8 Map example 3 In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the EcN0 color set. Base station icons are displayed and a red line is drawn to the serving base station and a blue line to the neighbor stations. In the Layer view in the map side , click on Add BTS File, or right-click on the measurement layer and select Add BTS File. Right-click on the measurement layer in the map side again, and select Properties | Base stations. Select the Draw line to active base station, and Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) options. On the Color page, select the Use color set option, select Ec/N0 (Active) in the Parameter field, and EcN0 in the Color set field. Click OK. The Color Legend in the side displays the color codes for the EcNo values.

Page 320

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.9 Map example 4 In the map below, the same measurement route is drawn twice on the map. The route with the blue current location symbol is colored using the Ec/N0 color set, and the route with the black current location symbol is colored using the MS Power Level color set. In the Layers view click the Add Route button, or right-click on the existing measurement layer and select Add Route. Select a device from the Route Properties | Device page, and now there should be two measurements in the Layers view in the side . Right-click on the first measurement route and select Properties. On the Route Properties | Color page, select the Use color set option, and Ec/N0(active) in the Parameter field, and Ec/N0 in the Color set field. Click OK. Next, right-click on the second measurement in the Layers view, and select Properties. In the Route Properties | Color page, select the Use color set option, and MS Power Level in the Parameter field, and MS Power Level in the Color set field. Click OK. You will see the two adjacent routes colored with the above-mentioned color sets on the map. In addition, you will see the measurements in the Layers view, and their color sets in the Color legends view in the map side .

Page 321

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.10

Map example 5

It is possible to export a map with measurement route, colors based on selected parameter, parameter values, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml file. The Google Earth application needs to be installed for viewing the file. Click on the Export to Google Earth toolbar button

Page 322

in the map window.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

A Save As dialog appears. Select a destination for the saved .kml file in the Save in field, and type a name for the map to be exported in the File name field. Click Save.

Go to the file destination and double-click on the saved file to open it. Note that you must have Google Earth installed on your laptop to view the file.

The route and cell information are visible on the Google Earth map.

Page 323

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.30.11

Map Example 6

With scanner measurements, it is possible to view parameter values for a specific channel or scrambling code on a map. In this example we will view RX level values for a selected channel. First open a scanner measurement on a map.

Right-click on the route layer in the Layers view and select Properties.

Page 324

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

On the Route Properties, Color page, select Use color set. Select RX level in the Parameter field. The corresponding color set is selected automatically.

Click on Configure Filters. In the Select Channels dialog, first click Remove All and then select one channel by double-clicking on the channel in the Available list. Click OK and OK.

The route now displays the RX level values for the selected channel.

Page 325

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

6.31 Export/import settings It is possible to export and import various settings and measurement lists from and to Nemo Outdoor. This function can also be used to send configurations remotely to Nemo Outdoor from an (S)FTP server.

6.31.1 Export settings to file To export settings to a file, go to File | Export Settings | To File in Nemo Outdoor. Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.

Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.

Page 326

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The selected items are now saved in the .aex file.

6.31.2 Export settings to FTP server To export settings to an FTP server, go to File | Export Settings | To FTP Server in Nemo Outdoor. Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.

Click the FTP Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 338 for more information on the settings. Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.

Page 327

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The selected items are now saved in the .aex file and exported to the FTP server. The exported settings can now be ed from the FTP server to any Nemo Outdoor unit with access to the server.

6.31.3 Import settings from file To import settings, select File | Import Settings | From File in Nemo Outdoor. Select the file and click Open.

Select the settings you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.

Page 328

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken into use.

6.31.4 Import settings from FTP server To import settings from an FTP server, select File | Import Settings | From FTP Server in Nemo Outdoor. If you have not defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server settings are defined, a list of exported setting files will appear.

Select the parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.

Page 329

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken into use.

Page 330

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

7

ENDING MEASUREMENTS

The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the main window. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement.

To end measurements: 1.

If you are using a script to perform the measurement, you can either wait until the script file has been executed or interrupt the script either by selecting Measurement | Stop Script or by clicking the Stop button

2.

on the toolbar.

If you are performing measurements manually, the measurement process is terminated either by selecting Measurement | Stop or by clicking the Stop button

on the toolbar.

All the ongoing calls will be stopped and scanning will be terminated. Data transfers will be stopped, PDP context will be deactivated, and GPRS detach will be performed. 3.

Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. At this point, you can choose if you would like to save this file or delete it. You can also start a playback of this file.

4.

If you wish to exit Nemo Outdoor, select File | Exit or click the cross in the upper right corner of the Nemo Outdoor main window.

♦

When carrying out measurements using a script, stopping the measurement is not recommended while a test call is on. Always wait until the end of the call, then select Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. If the measurement is stopped while the test call is on, it may affect the Quality Survey Report values. The Call Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might indicate calls to be shorter than they actually were.

Page 331

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

7.1

Measurement report

The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped. The dialog displays some statistics from the measurement. Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel .csv file. The filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results folder. Select the Send measurement results to FTP server option to send the log files to an FTP server. See chapter ing measurement files to server for more information. If you do not want this dialog to appear, select the Do not show this dialog again option. Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are deleted. •

measurement files (.nmf)

•

binary files (.nbl)

•

packet capture files (.pcap)

•

marker files (.mrk)

•

indoor map files (.tab and image)

To save the measurement file under another name, click the Rename button and type a new file name in the field that appears. To delete the file without saving, click the Delete button. To export the measurement, click the Export button (see Exporting measurements).

Page 332

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately. To save the file, click Save. ♦

Note that if you press Esc on your computer’s keyboard, or click on the

button on the

dialog, you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save button. Click the Export button the access the Export Measurements dialog (see Exporting measurements). Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze. ♦

Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze installed on the same computer where Nemo Outdoor is installed.

In the Export to Nemo Analyze dialog, select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a report template that is used for creating a report from the data. If you do not select a workbook or a report, the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo Analyze. Finally click Export.

Page 333

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

8

MEASUREMENT RESULTS

This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor, and explains how measurement files are ed to an FTP server. The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time, depending on whether you have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. The file name can be defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part. If you change the file name manually, the file name format should be xxxx.1.nmf where the number refers to the device number.

8.1

Analyzing measurement results The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed, for example, with: •

Nemo Outdoor Playback functions

•

Nemo Analyze

•

Nemo WindCatcher

•

Text editor

•

Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft® Excel

Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Anite.

8.2

Playing back measurement files Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. You can playback files anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on.

8.2.1

Selecting playback files When you open a file for playback, Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. If you answer Yes, Nemo Outdoor will save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the playback when you close the playback file(s).

Page 334

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To open files for playback, select File  Open Measurement. This will open up the following dialog.

In the dialog, you can look for a file by clicking the … button. The File Header box displays the measurement file header. If you have selected a multi measurement, you can remove some of the files from playback.

8.2.2

During playback The Playback commands can be executed with a set of toolbar buttons. The same commands can be found in the Playback menu. The Play button starts the playback. The Pause button pauses the playback. The Stop button stops the playback. The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback; that is, the starting, ending, and current time. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.

Page 335

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

8.2.3

Viewing and moving markers You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during measurements. After a file has been loaded, select the Play command from the Playback menu or click the Play button on the tool bar. Open a marker grid from Data | Events Grid | Markers.

The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during measurements. Click on any of the markers in the grid window, and all the other open windows will display the same point of time. Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move the markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move button. Place the red pin to the new location on the map. The new longitude and latitude information is saved in the marker file.

Page 336

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

8.2.4

Closing playback files After playback, you need to close the playback file. Select File | Close Measurement. If you saved the current device configuration when you started the playback, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load the same device(s).

8.3

ing measurement files to server You can measurement files from Nemo Outdoor to an FTP server or to Nemo Xynergy database when a measurement is stopped, or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor interface. Note that it is recommended to stop all measurements before ing files. Select File | Send Measurement to Server. First select the server type, FTP or Xynergy from the bottom left corner of the dialog and then select the measurement files.

Page 337

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Click the Options button to define settings for the selected server (FTP or Nemo Xynergy). After configuring the settings, click OK. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.

If you files on an HTTPS server, the URL from which the file can be loaded is displayed for each ed file. URLs can be easily copied and distributed e.g. by email.

8.3.1

FTP Options

Define the server address, name, and and the name of the Remote folder, i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server. Select the Use SFTP protocol option to send the measurement files using SFTP protocol. Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol. Select the Use ive mode option to send the measurement files using ive mode.

Page 338

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

When the Move local files to “Sent” folder after option is selected, the measurement files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer. You can also change this default destination in Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements. The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a -selected data connection, or via mobile broadband. When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, name and fields will become active.

8.3.2

Nemo Xynergy Options

Define the name, , and URI and click the Refresh button. Nemo Outdoor will connect with the Nemo Xynergy server. After the connection has been established, you will be able to define the project type (acceptance, optimization, benchmarking), region, market, cluster, and project. You can also add new clusters and projects.

Page 339

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

8.4

Exporting measurements With the Export Measurements functionality it is possible to export measurement files from Nemo File Format to MapInfo or .csv formats. Close all measurements and select File | Export Measurements. You can also export individual measurements through the Measurement report dialog when you are ending measurements.

Page 340

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The Export Measurements dialog is opened.

Template contains a predefined set of parameters and parameter rules for export. To create a new template, select New in the Template field and type a name for the template. Then select the parameters that will be exported and define parameter rules. When you export the parameters, the settings are saved. The saved template will be available in the Template field the next time you open the Export Measurements dialog. With the Add Measurement and Add Folder buttons you can add individual measurement files or entire folders containing measurement files to be exported. Export format defines the format in which the files are stored. The options are MapInfo TAB file and CSV file. Number of values per parameter defines the maximum number of values exported for parameters that can have multiple values. Export interval defines at what rate (in seconds or meters) parameter values are sampled from the measurement data for export. If you select all, all data is exported. By default, multiple values of the same parameter are exported in a single column. To create a separate column for each value, select the Separate values to columns option.

Page 341

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

With the Export files to folder option, the individual files will be saved in a folder. Also define the Target folder. With the Export to single file option, the selected files will be stored in a single .tab file. Click the Select Parameters button to define which parameters will be included in the export.

Select a parameter from the list of available parameters and with the arrow button move it to the right. The selected parameters will be exported. You can also make more rules for selecting parameter values for export. Only those parameter values that meet the rule will be exported. Click the Edit Rules button.

Page 342

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Select a parameter from the field in the middle. Then define the condition and value for the parameter and click Add to List. You can define as many rules as you wish. Finally click OK. When you have selected all parameters to be exported, click OK.

Page 343

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9

INTERFACE

This section presents the Nemo Outdoor interface. You will find general descriptions on all the commands and windows. The functions and dialogs related to the commands are described in detail in the following sections. The Nemo Outdoor interface is compatible with common Windows® standards. If you are not familiar with these standards, refer to your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation.

9.1

View groups View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs for easier viewing. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same time and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Now you can create view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view group appears at the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab.

When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time, you will have one default view group. To rename the default view group, right-click on the tab and select Rename.

Enter a name for the view group and click OK.

To create a new view group, right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups, and select Create New. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. The new view group appears as another tab.

To organize measurement windows into the view groups, open a view group, for example, Maps, and open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. Then go to another view group by clicking on the respective tab, for example, Graphs and open measurement windows there. The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will be opened the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.

Page 344

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To copy the contents of an existing view group to a new view group, right-click on the view group label and select Copy to New View Group. Type a name for the new view group and select the device for which the data is displayed.

If you need to change the device for which the views in a particular view group are displaying data, right-click the view group label and select Select Device. Select the device from the list. All the views in the view group will be updated to display data from the selected device.

9.2

Menu bar

The menu bar contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in menus. Some commands execute their respective operations immediately, while others will first display a dialog with options for you to select from. A command ending in three dots (…) will open a dialog. Note that you can use shortcut keys to carry out some of the commands. The shortcut keys are presented on the menus next to the menu commands.

9.3

Toolbar

You can use the toolbar with the mouse for quick access to frequently used commands. In the View menu, you can choose to hide the toolbar; this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window. The Nemo Outdoor toolbar comprises of a set of buttons that allow you to perform common tasks quickly. For example, to start the measurement, just click the Start Recording button on the toolbar. See chapter Toolbar buttons for more information on the Nemo Outdoor toolbar buttons.

9.4

Status bar The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information depending on the operations you are performing. For example, when you are pointing to a toolbar button with the mouse (without clicking), the status bar will show a description of the corresponding function. You can also see a brief description of the same function in a help box that appears next to the button when you hold the mouse over the button long enough. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement. In the View menu, you can select to hide the status bar; this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window.

9.5

Nemo Outdoor menus The menus in the Nemo Outdoor software are introduced next.

Page 345

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.5.1

File menu

The File menu allows you to open and save Workspace files and Device Configurations. Measurement files for playback are also opened through the File menu. By selecting the Save Workspace on Exit option, the current configuration is saved in a file and opened automatically the next time the program is started. The Work Offline item activates and deactivates the offline mode. The Send Measurement to FTP Server enables you to send measurement files to an FTP server (see chapter ing measurement files to server). With the Export Measurements tool you can export measurement files from Nemo File Format to MapInfo or .csv formats (see chapter Exporting measurements). With the Export and Import Settings items you can export and import settings into an .aex file. The following items are stored in the .aex file: •

Scripts

•

Color sets

•

Custom views

•

Device configurations

•

Notification settings

•

Route plans

•

Workspaces

You can also export measurements. Note that measurement needs to be closed before export. The Recent Workspaces, Recent Device Configurations, and Recent Measurements items display the recently used workspaces and device configurations and recently viewed playback files, respectively. With the Exit command you can close the program.

Page 346

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.5.2

Edit menu

In the Edit menu, you can copy and save as images selected items from the Nemo Outdoor program. It is also possible to export data views as images and open them in third-party tools. Please note that playback needs to be idle or paused and measurement must be paused when exporting views. The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.

9.5.3

Page 347

View menu

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the View menu, you can select, hide and display items of the main window, such as the standard toolbar, custom window toolbar, status indicator, output, and device status, those you wish to see on the screen. Through quick windows you have easy access to custom windows defined by the . You can also access the Configuration Manager, Color Set Editor, Notification Manager, Parameters and the Interface Properties dialogs. Through the View Groups item you can create new view groups or switch between existing View groups. The Active View Properties will open a properties dialog for the currently active window.

9.5.4

Measurement menu

Through the Measurement menu, you can control the measurement process and add, autodetect, and remove devices. The Start Scripts command starts and stops a -defined script file. These same commands can be executed by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts

button in the toolbar. In the Script Editor you

can edit script files. With the Start Measurement List item you can edit and run Measurement lists. You can also add markers and textual notes in the measurement file. The Clear Buffers command will empty the event history buffer. This does not affect the measurement file. Measurement Servers and Nemo Invex Maintenance Tool items apply only to Nemo Invex. Through the All Devices item you can control several devices at once. For example, you can make a voice call or send an SMS with all test mobiles connected to Nemo Outdoor. Below All Devices are listed individually all measurement devices connected to the system. Through these items you can control and configure the individual test terminals.

Page 348

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Measurement Properties – General, Measurement Properties – Measurement, Measurement Properties – Frequency scanning with mobiles, Measurement Properties – Pilot scanning with mobiles, and Measurement Properties - Script dialogs can be accessed through this menu. By selecting the Reset command, you can reset the Devices window, for example, if you want to reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it. The menu also offers access to various actions that can be performed during manual measurements. If you are using scripts to run measurements, you will not need these commands. ♦

9.5.5

Please note that the menu displays only those functions that are ed by the device.

Remote menu

Through the Remote menu you can activate the Remote mode, initiate a maintenance session, and cancel all pending remote sessions.

Page 349

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.5.6

Playback menu

The Playback menu offers you tools for the playback of measurement data. You can also export a measurement file to Nemo Analyze by selecting Analyze. This will open the Export to Nemo Analyze dialog.

9.5.7

Data menu Through the Data menu you can open different views for observing a measurement. You can also access the Open Custom Window dialog (see chapter Custom windows).

Under each type you will find a selection of premade custom windows of the selected type. If you select New, Nemo Outdoor will open an empty graph of the selected type.

Page 350

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The Grid items offer a selection of grid types. Events grids list, by default, all measurement events but the can configure the view so that only events that are of special interest are displayed. Parameters grids display selected network parameters. Statistics grids list various statistics, such as, the number of PDP context activation attempts, successes, and failures from the measurement. Messages grids are used for observing layer 2 and 3, RLC/MAC, and LLC messages. Table grids provide an easy way of simultaneously displaying the same parameter values for multiple instances. For example, the neighbor list of a serving cell can be displayed in a table grid so that each row represents one neighbor and each column represents a parameter value (e.g., system, carrier, scrambling code, etc.). The Packet Decoder Grid offers a chance to display and decode packet capture files in playback mode. The Indoor item opens a floorplan (see chapter Viewing indoor maps). The Map item opens a map window (see chapter Viewing maps). The Save as Custom Window… item offers a quick way to save your own custom windows. The custom windows are presented in chapter Custom windows. The Save Custom Window Changes option saves changes to custom windows. For example, if you resize the windows, Nemo Outdoor will open the window in the same size the next time you start the program.

9.5.8

Window menu

The Window menu provides you with a list of all open windows on the main window. You can switch the focus between these windows and arrange them with the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, Tile Vertically, and Arrange Icons commands. With the Close All command you can close all windows at once. The active window is marked with a check mark .

9.5.9

Help menu

The Help menu offers you quick access to all the most important help topics, the shortcut guide, and the Nemo File Format document. By selecting the License Information item, you can check the current license status for your Nemo Outdoor version. From the About dialog you can also receive further information on the Nemo Outdoor application, including the information and the application version number.

Page 351

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.6

Parameters view The Parameters view offers an easy way to open data views for a certain parameter. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on a graph. Alternatively, right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type (line graph, vertical bar, map, indoor view, etc.) from the menu.

Parameters can also be opened for several devices at once. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type from the menu. Move your mouse pointer on top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will display more information about that particular parameter. The tooltip text can also be copied to clipboard.

Page 352

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.6.1

Parameters view search functionality A -specified search string can be used to search parameters, parameter short names and possible alias names. In addition, the string matching s multiple search substrings separated by spaces i.e. HSDPA BLER search string matches, for example, HSDPA MAC-hs BLER and HSDPA HARQ process BLER.

9.7

Customizing menus and toolbars Nemo Outdoor menus and toolbars are fully customizable. To edit the contents of menus, to add new menus, or edit the toolbars, right-click on the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the main window and select Customize.

In the Toolbars page hide and display the default toolbars by clearing and selecting the corresponding options. Click the New button to create a new toolbar. In the New Toolbar dialog, type a name for the new toolbar and click OK.

Page 353

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The new toolbar is added to the Customize dialog. Delete the toolbar by selecting it and clicking the Delete button.

In the Commands page you will find all available commands sorted under categories. Drag commands from the list to a toolbar or menu.

Page 354

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

To remove commands from a toolbar or menu, drag and drop the command outside the toolbar or menu. If you want to restore the original toolbar and menu content, open the Customize dialog (right-click on main toolbar and select Customize) and in the Toolbars page, select the toolbar or menu bar you want to restore and click the Reset button.

Page 355

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

In the Options page you can further personalize the appearance of toolbars and menus. For example, you can activate large icons for toolbars for easier viewing or change the menu animations.

You can also change the icon for each toolbar button. Open the Customize dialog, right-click on a button, and select Change Button Image.

9.8

Nemo Outdoor windows The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly configurable. Different network parameters and events can be viewed as line graphs, bars, and dots. To make the measuring process easier for first-time s, Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some essential windows for specific types of measuring. The s are also able to make their own custom windows and save them for later use.

Page 356

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.8.1

Custom windows Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed through the Data menu or the Custom window tool bar if selected in the View menu. They are also accessible through the parameter tree. The custom windows are grouped under the corresponding graph and grid types. You can also browse for the existing custom windows through the Open Custom Window dialog (Data | Open Custom Window).

You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph, grid, map, indoor view) or by technology (AMPS, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, etc.). Select the custom window you would like to open from the table on the right and click Open. You can also save your own custom windows. When you have set up a graph view that you would like to use later on, activate the window that you would like to save and select Data | Save as Custom Window. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window. After clicking OK, the window is added to the custom windows list. If you want to remove some custom windows, select the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete button. The Quick Windows bar

(go to View, and select Quick Windows) in

Nemo Outdoor main window offers quick access to custom windows. Click on one of the quick windows, and select a custom window from the list. Click OK. The next time you click on the same quick window button, that selected custom window will appear.

Page 357

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.8.2

Page 358

Devices view

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The Devices view offers easy access to the most common commands and configuration dialogs. The view displays all devices connected to Nemo Outdoor and the device-specific commands. By double-clicking the various items in the view, you can access the related configuration dialogs. For example, double-click the FTP item to access the FTP Transfer Properties dialog. It is also possible to select multiple devices (Ctrl+left-click) and define settings that will be applied to all selected devices. For example, if the same APN is used with several devices, you can select the devices and define the APN for all devices at one go. When you have selected multiple devices, you can only edit settings that are ed by all the selected devices. From the ed Data Protocols list, select the data protocol (FTP, SMTP, T/UDP, etc.) used in the measurements. Measurement servers button opens the Measurement Servers dialog (see Nemo Invex device set-up) where you can connect to Nemo Invex servers. Note that this button is activated only if your Nemo Outdoor license includes the Nemo Invex option. Add or remove devices button opens a menu where you can choose to add a new device or remove the selected device. Measurement control button offers access to some commands that are ed by the selected device, such as, start/stop voice call, GPRS attach/detach, SMS/MMS message sending. Measurement settings button offers access to configuration and properties dialogs. The selection is devicespecific. Device connection settings button opens the Device Configuration dialog (see Devices). Device measurement settings button opens the Measurement Properties – Measurement page for the selected device. Device notification settings button opens the Measurement Properties - Notifications page (see Notifications) for the selected device. Device script settings button opens the Measurement Properties - Script page for the selected device. Group devices by type/server button organizes the devices in the view.

Page 359

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.8.3

Device Status view

The Device Status view displays the device status. The green light at the upper left corner is blinking whenever the device is active and connected. Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the Status view to the top of the main view.

Page 360

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the devices in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and finally click OK.

Page 361

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.8.4

Output window

The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. Icons (

) next to

the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. For example, the speech bubble indicates a normal message, the orange flag a warning, the red flag an error message, and the exclamation mark a notification. The window can be opened by choosing View | Output. You can clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear Window from the popup menu.

9.8.5

♦

Script Status window

Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners, this window is also not available when making scanner measurements. From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current measurement.

9.8.6

Controlling windows You can have several windows open at the same time. The minimizing, maximizing, and closing functions for individual windows operate in the same way as in all Windows applications. The active window is indicated through a color specified in the Windows® Control to indicate an active window (see your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation). You can drag windows outside the Nemo Outdoor desktop area to make more space on the main window.

9.8.6.1 Cascade windows The Cascade command in the Window menu organizes the windows in an overlapping array. You can bring any window to the top by selecting it from the Window menu or by clicking any visible part of that window (except for the Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons in the top right corner). You can also bring the next window to the top by selecting the Next command from the window-specific menu (top left corner of the window).

Page 362

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

9.8.6.2 Tile windows The Tile command in the Window menu organizes the windows side by side, filling the whole space so that all windows are visible at the same time. The windows can be tiled horizontally or vertically.

9.8.6.3 Arrange icons The windows that have been minimized to icons can be arranged evenly in a row at the bottom of the main window, starting from the left side. To do this, select the Arrange Icons command in the Window menu.

9.8.6.4 Close all The Close All command in the Window menu can be used to close all measurement windows in the Nemo Outdoor main window.

9.8.6.5 Saving window settings If you wish to retain the same settings on your main window the next time you use Nemo Outdoor, activate the Save Workspace on Exit command in the File menu. Clicking the command will result on a check mark ; the second click will remove the mark.

Page 363

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor.

10.1 Low throughput In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications, read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various T based protocols. In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications, the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters. For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio) points to capacity, server or transmission problems. In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR). PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other s in the cell, a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the available bandwidth). Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are other s sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput. High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage. When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values. Other things that could help troubleshooting: •

Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry.

•

Disable IP capturing from Measurement Properties – Measurement page..

•

Try another FTP server for comparison.

•

Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. For better results, keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. Also try different servers.

•

For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed.

Page 364

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

•

For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.

10.1.1 All Windows versions How to check the T window size from packet logs: Using Wireshark: Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) T traffic in the middle of the transfer. Window size value tells the current T window size used.

Using Nemo Outdoor: 1.

Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.

2.

Look at the T traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:

3.

Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the T tree. Window shows the current value.

Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.): 1.

Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.

•

T Window size set to n = Value found from registry.

•

T Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default.

•

T Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning T window.

2.

A measurement file does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed.

Page 365

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Windows does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window size which is handled by T auto-tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is set, Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This registry entry can be removed. If T auto-tuning is disabled, Windows will limit the window size to 64 KB even if the value has been configured to be higher from Nemo Outdoor.

How to check T auto-tuning state:

♦

Page 366

1.

Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field.

2.

Type ”netsh interface t show global”

3.

Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.

Please note that rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

4. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Right-click and select Run as .

5.

To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface t set global autotuning=disabled”. This limits the T window size to 64KB.

6.

To increase the maximum T window size that auto-tuning uses, type “netsh interface t set global autotuning=highlyrestricted”.

7.

Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:

•

disabled: Uses a fixed value for the T receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535).

•

highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value, very conservatively.

•

restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the T receive window beyond its default value.

•

normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions.

•

experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for research purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.

Page 367

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

10.2 Device Status view The Device Status view displays the device status.

If a green light is blinking, it means that the device is properly connected to Nemo Outdoor and is functioning normally. If a red light is blinking, it means that the device has been disconnected. Connect the device, rightclick on the device in the Devices view and select Reset.

10.3 Cannot add devices If the Add button

is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo

Outdoor, your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. Please, see chapter Licensing for more information. If the HASP USB key is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated, check that recording is not on. Also, playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement).

Page 368

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

10.4 Required license option missing If the error message below appears, your copy protection dongle is missing a license option. In other words, the measurement device s technologies or features that require additional license options. For example, if you are measuring with an LTE-A Cat 6 device and you have purchased the LTE license instead of the LTE-A license, you can use the device with Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex II but the LTE-A parameters will be missing. Please Nemo Technical ( [email protected]) if you wish to purchase the additional license options.

10.5 Cannot make calls/packet transfers If the commands are inactive in the Measurement control menu online. The Work offline or online button

, check that you have devices

should be unselected.

10.6 Measurement file checksum notification Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the measurement is stopped. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for playback. The is notified by the Nemo Outdoor interface when opening a measurement file where modification is detected. However, measurement files are still opened normally. The last line in the measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum information.

#HASH,14:46:49.262,1,"0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0" Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5.4 or earlier do not include checksum information and the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version 5.50 or later.

10.7 Number of USB devices exceeded With new laptops an error may occur when six or more USB devices are connected to the laptop.

Page 369

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

The linked image cannot be displayed. The file may have been moved, renamed, or deleted. that the link points to the correct file and location.

The current of the USB hub used by the laptop exceeds the max. value per device and the driver blocks additional devices. This applies especially to the USB 3.0 host controllers based on the Intel chipset. The issue can be fixed by uninstalling the Intel USB 3.0 host controller driver. The linked image cannot be displayed. The file may have been moved, renamed, or deleted. that the link points to the correct file and location.

♦

Note that especially with Lenovo computers, the driver is automatically installed with system updates. Automated updates should be disabled.

Page 370

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

11 NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS

11.1 Toolbar buttons These are the buttons available in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. Title

Page 371

Button

Description

Open Playback File(s)

Opens an existing measurement for playback

Open Workspace

Opens an existing workspace file.

Save Workspace

Saves the current workspace configuration.

Configuration Manager

Opens the Configuration Manager dialog.

Work Offline

Switches the offline mode on and off.

Start Recording

Nemo Outdoor starts writing a file of the current measurement.

Start Playback

Starts the playback with the selected files.

Pause

Pauses the playback/recording.

Stop

Stops the playback/recording.

Start/Stop Scripts

Switches a script on/off.

Add Marker

Adds a marker in the measurement file or on the Indoor map.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Add Textual Note

Adds a textual note in the measurement file.

Open Custom Window

Opens the Open Custom Window dialog.

Save As New Custom Window

Saves the active window as a new custom window.

Save Changes to Custom Window

Saves changes to the active custom window.

Save As Image

Saves the active window as an image file (.jpg).

11.2 Dialog buttons These are the dialog buttons used in Nemo Outdoor. Title

Page 372

Button

Description

Expand Device Info Window

Displays the selected device info parameters in the Device Info window.

Device notification settings

Opens the Notifications dialog where you can select the events of which Nemo Outdoor will display or play a notification.

Device Commands

Through the Device Commands button you have access to various mobile specific functions.

Device Settings

Offers access to several dialogs.

Autodetect Devices

Automatically detects devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.

Refresh

Updates information in the Configuration Manager.

Properties

Opens a Properties dialog for the selected item in the Configuration Manager.

Add

Adds a new device, event trigger, or script depending on the item selected in the Configuration Manager.

Remove

Removes the selected device, event trigger, or script from the Configuration Manager.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

11.3 Graph toolbar buttons These are the toolbar buttons available when using graphs. Title

Page 373

Button

Description

Hide Layer

Hides the selected layer in the graph

Remove Layer

Removes the selected layer

New Layer

Opens the New Layer dialog where you can configure a new layer to be added in the active graph.

Layer Properties

Opens the Layer Properties dialog where you can edit an existing layer.

Move Layer Down

Moves the selected layer down in the layer view

Move Layer Up

Moves the selected layer up in the layer view

Set Stacked Mode

If there are two or more layers in a graph, you can view them in stacked mode; that is, in separate graphs.

Autoscroll

When the button is pressed down, the graph is scrolling automatically as the measurement proceeds.

Show s

Displays the info with numerical values on the right side of the graph.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

11.4 Map toolbar buttons These are the toolbar buttons available when using maps. Title

Page 374

Button

Description

Open Map

Opens the Open dialog for selecting a map file.

Save Map

Saves the current map layers and settings into a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst).

Import Map

Opens the Map Import Parameters dialog for importing bitmap images as floorplans. Available only in the Indoor map.

Layer Properties

Opens the selected layer's Properties dialog where you can configure the layer properties.

Find Map at Position

With the automatic map find feature the can easily locate all maps from same location.

Create Route Plan

Creates a route plan from an open measurement.

Open Route Plan

Through this item you can open saved route plans.

Save Route Plan

Allows you to save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf).

Add Waypoint

Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

Arrow

Changes the cursor into an arrow, which you can use for selecting items.

Pan

Changes the cursor into a hand, which you can use for dragging the map to a different position. Place the hand on the map. Keep the left mouse button pressed down and move the map.

Center

Changes the cursor into the center tool, which you can use for selecting a point on the map on which the map view will be centered.

Zoom In

Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass, which you can use for zooming in on the map.

Zoom Out

Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass, which you can use for zooming out on the map.

Clear Route

Clears the measurement route from the map. This button is active only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

Set Current Location

Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. That this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be used during playback.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Page 375

Auto Center

With the Auto Center tool activated, the map view will always center on the test vehicle. This requires that a GPS receiver is used.

Auto Center Sensitivity

The Auto center sensitivity slider defines in percentages the sensitivity of the activated Auto Center tool. The higher the percentage, the sooner the map is centered on the test vehicle when it moves around on the route.

Previous View

Click the Previous View button to return to the previous map view, for example, if you have moved the map with the Pan tool.

Entire Map

Click the Entire Map button to display the entire map after zooming in.

Entire Route

With the Entire Route button you can view the whole route on the map.

Scale Bar

Activate the Scale Bar button to view a scale bar in the map window.

Measure Distance

With the Measure Distance tool you can measure the distance on the map in kilometers between multiple points.

Side

Activate the Side button to view the side in the map window.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

12 SHORTCUT KEYS

This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window can be displayed by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.

Page 376

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

13 NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS

Below are described the default notification symbols. Attach Attempt

MMS Receiving Attempt

Attach Failed

MMS Receiving Failed

Attach Success

MMS Receiving Success MMS Sending Attempt

Call Alerting

MMS Sending Failed

Call Answered

MMS Sending Success

Call Attempt Call Connected

Packet Call Attempt

Call Disconnect

Packet Call Connected

Call Dropped

Packet Call Disconnected

Call Failed

Packet Call Failed

Call Received

Packet Technology Changed to HSDPA Packet Technology Changed to UMTS

Cell Change Attempt

PTT Idle

Cell Change Failed

PTT Receiving

Cell Change Success

PTT Transmitting

Cell Reselection

Page 377

Cell Reselection (3G) GSM/UMTS

RX Level Low/Bad

Cell Reselection (2G) UMTS/GSM

Routing Area Update Attempt

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Routing Area Update Failed Context Activation Attempt

Routing Area Update Success

Context Activation Failed Context Activation Success

Semiduplex Call Attempt

Context Deactivation

Service Lost Service Received

Data Call Attempt Data Connection Attempt

SMS/USSD Received

Data Connection Failed

SMS/USSD Receiving Attempt

Data Connection Success

SMS/USSD Receiving Failed

Data Disconnect

SMS/USSD Sending Completed

Data Transfer Attempt Data Transfer Success

Soft Handover Failure

Data Transfer Failed

Soft Handover Success

Dead Reckoning in Use

TX Power High/UL Power Up High

Detach Differential GPS in Use

Video Call Attempt

Duplex Call Attempt

Voice Call Attempt/Voice Call Attempt (ETSI)

FER High

Voice Call Connected (ETSI) Voice Call Disconnected (ETSI)

GPS Fix Lost GPS Fix Received

Page 378

Voice Call Dropped (ETSI)

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

HS-DSCH Serving Cell Changed

Star Thumb Down

Handover Attempt Handover Failed Handover Success

Location Area Update Attempt Location Area Update Failed Location Area Update Success Marker Markov Call Attempt Measurement Error

Page 379

Thumb Up

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

14 TECHNICAL

If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo tools, please our technical service through Nemo Portal at http://nemo.anite.com, call us (local phone numbers can be found in chapter Phone and Email ) or send us an email at [email protected]. Note that for full you need to have the Maintenance Agreement.

14.1 Club Nemo Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. You can find it from http://nemoclub.anite.com. Access to the Nemo Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and Technical agreements or partner agreements. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer with SW maintenance and Technical agreements, but you are without access to the Club, please complete an on-line registration form. After submitting the requested information, you will receive a personal access key and by email in a few days’ time. Once you are ed with our Club, you will automatically receive e-mails informing you each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. It is fast, easy, and it is available to you seven days a week, 24 hours a day.

14.2 Nemo Portal Nemo Portal is a web interface for technical , product-related questions, and RMA requests. It offers a fast and convenient way to reach our technical team and submit repair, warranty repair, and calibration requests. Customers can open a ticket, follow the status of existing tickets, and request technical 24/7/365. Furthermore the Nemo Portal includes a Knowledge Base for the most frequent and latest topics on Nemo Products. Submitting a ticket via Nemo Portal ensures that our technical specialists have all the necessary information available to solve your case, resulting in faster response times. Please go to http://nemo.anite.com to access the portal and click “Request access” to obtain a to the system.

14.3 Phone and Email During the warranty period, the phone related to potential software errors is free of additional charge. ed s with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full . Nemo Portal is the preferred channel for technical requests, but you can also send us an email. When emailing, please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and Agreement. Please us at the following locations (global email address [email protected]):

Page 380

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Global Tel.

+358 50 395 7800

Americas Tel.

+1 469 951 9105 +1 469 774 4608 (En español e português)

APAC Tel.

+65 9746 2431

P.R. China Tel.

+86 10 6567 8528

India Tel.

Page 381

+91 982 0016372

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

15 APPENDIX 1

15.1 Making MapInfo® raster maps Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic images into MapInfo®. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps you create in MapInfo®. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can display it in a map window. Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo® can read the following types of raster images: •

filename.TIF

•

filename.GIF

•

filename.JPG

•

filename.PCX

•

filename.BMP

•

filename.BIL

Color options are: •

Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white.

•

Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade of gray.

•

Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors. MapInfo® s 256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we recommend using gray scale images. By doing this, the measurement route can be discerned better than with color map images.

15.1.1 ing a raster map with MapInfo® SW If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must the raster map image so that MapInfo® can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the Image Registration Dialog. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster image map. It is important to provide accurate control point information when ing a raster map image. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as street intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a paper map.

To a raster map: 1.

Start the MapInfo® software. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format. Select your raster map image file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image Registration Dialog is displayed. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen.

Page 382

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

2.

Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. If you do not know the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.

3.

Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). The Add Control Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels. Add Map X and Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the coordinates 65 degrees, 30 minutes, enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when specifying west and south coordinates. If you want to a raster map that does not use longitude and latitude coordinates, specify the appropriate projection in the Image Registration Dialog. Enter your coordinates in the native units of the coordinate system. For example, if you are ing a UTM map image, enter coordinates in meters. Using the MapBasic® program, you can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees format, or the conversion from d/m/s to decimal degrees is as follows: degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal degrees

4.

You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily identified and selected in the map window.

5.

After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog. The raster map will be displayed in the map window.

6.

Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.

7.

Page 383

Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

16 APPENDIX 2

16.1 CDMA settings and PRL editing in Nemo Outdoor You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dia Nemo Outdoor through Device Settings

.

In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items.

You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings. A known SPC can also be overwritten by this plugin.

Page 384

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Directory number defines a phone number MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal MIN2 defines a three-digit area code SPC defines the service programming code IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2

On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items. This can be used to load any previously saved PRL’s onto any Qualcomm-based mobile. You can also use this feature to save a PRL from a connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile.

On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features.

Page 385

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Should you need to manually edit a PRL, you can use the Presto tool which can be ed from CDG.org. The page can be accessed by searching for “prl” using the search tool on the main page.

Click on the prltools.asp link to get to the s page.

From there you can the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it. Install the suite when launched. This will add a tool bar called “Presto” to MS Excel.

Run the Setup.exe file. Click Install in the dialog that appears.

Page 386

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears.

Click Next in the Welcome window. Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog, and click Next. Click Next to confirm installation. Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog. Next, open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite | PRESTO. It should look as follows in Excel:

Page 387

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

17 END- LICENSE AGREEMENT

IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY: This End- License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Network Testing Ltd for the Anite Network Testing Ltd software product(s), in whatever form, identified above ("Software Product" or "Software"). The Software Product includes computer software, the associated media, any printed materials, and any "online" or electronic documentation. By installing, copying or otherwise using the Software Product, you agree to be bound by the of this EULA. If you do not agree to the of this EULA, Anite Network Testing Ltd is unwilling to license the Software Product to you. In such event, you may not use or copy the Software Product, and you should promptly return the unused product(s) in their original packaging to the place of purchase within thirty days of the date of original purchase. SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Software Product is licensed, not sold. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following rights: Software. You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with the mobile phone(s) and software protection key designated by Anite Network Testing Ltd for such use ("Designated Hardware"). You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the Software Product in use at a time for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to be used or to be distributed except as expressly provided for in this EULA. You may use one copy of the Software Product in binary code form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct system measurements using the Designated Hardware at various locations to the extent necessary for the permitted operation of the application software but may not duplicate the Software Product. Storage/Network/Single Use. You may also store or install a copy of the Software Product in binary code form only over an internal network, and distribute the Software Product to your other computers over an internal network. However, you must acquire and dedicate a license for the Software Product for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used or to which it is distributed. A license for the Software Product may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers. 2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. Removal, emulation, or reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection constitutes an unauthorized modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. Nothing in this license statement permits you to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or object formats. Limitations on Modifications, Adaptations and Other Changes. You may not modify, adapt or otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent you are expressly permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding this limitation or by Anite Network Testing Ltd's prior written consent.

Page 388

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Separation of Components. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and computer as designated above. Not for Resale. This Software Product is “Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license only permits personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for value except as specified below. Rental. You may not rent, lease or lend the Software Product to any person or entity. Software Transfer. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of your rights under this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Network Testing Ltd which such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. Security Mechanisms. Anite Network Testing and its d companies take all legal steps to eliminate piracy of their software products. In this context, the Software may include a security mechanism that can detect the installation or use of illegal copies of the Software, and collect and transmit data about those illegal copies. Data collected will not include any customer data created with the Software. By using the Software, you consent to such detection and collection of data, as well as its transmission and use if an illegal copy is detected. Anite Network Testing also reserves the right to use a hardware lock device, license istration software, and/or a license authorization key to control access to the Software. You may not take any steps to avoid or defeat the purpose of any such measures. Use of any Software without any required lock device or authorization key provided by Anite Network Testing is prohibited. Duration and Termination. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed media package or and continues until termination. You may terminate this EULA at any time. Without prejudice to any other rights, Anite Network Testing Ltd may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the and conditions of this EULA. In either event, you must destroy all copies of the Software Product and all associated media, printed materials, updates and component parts and to Anite Network Testing Ltd in writing that such has been done. 3. SERVICES. Anite Network Testing Ltd may provide you with services related to the Software Product (" Services"). Any supplemental software code provided to you as part of the Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the and conditions of this EULA. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite Network Testing Ltd as part of the Services, Anite Network Testing Ltd may use such information for its business purpose, including for product updates and development. 4. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. All title and copyrights in and to the Software Product (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets", incorporated into the Software Product), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the Software Product, are owned by Anite Network Testing Ltd or its suppliers. The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Software Product. You may not remove, modify or alter any Anite Network Testing Ltd copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product, including but not limited to any such notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation, in the Anite Network Testing Ltd Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes, in any of the runtime resources and/or in any web-presence or web-enabled notices, code or other embodiments originally contained in or dynamically or otherwise created by the Software Product. The Software Product may include following licenses with related copyrights and titles: WinWAP. Copyright © Winwap Technologies Oy. http://www.winwap.com

Page 389

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

Perceptual Objective Listening Quality Analysis (POLQA) according to ITU-T Recommendation P. 863 included in this product is protected by copyright and by European, US and other International patents and patent applications and is provided under license from OPTICOM Dipl.-Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, , 2011 – www.opticom.de POLQA® is a ed trademark of OPTICOM GmbH. Used by permission. © 2011 by the POLQA Coalition of OPTICOM GmbH, - SwissQual AG, Switzerland - KPN, The Netherlands - TNO, The Netherlands. www.polqa.info Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the POLQA software in whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the POLQA software or for normal security back-up purposes; prevent the End- from modifying, translating, reverseengineering or decompiling the POLQA software except to the extent permitted by law; require that the acknowledgement of the rights in the POLQA software shall not be removed from the POLQA software or any installation of it;

Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) measurement technology included in this product is protected by copyright and by European, US and other patents and is provided under license from OPTICOM Dipl.-Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, , 2008 - www.opticom.de For further information please refer to www.pesq.org Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the PESQ software in whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the PESQ software or for normal security back-up purposes; prevent the End- from modifying, translating, reverse-engineering or decompiling the PESQ software except to the extent permitted by law; require that the acknowledgement of the rights in the PESQ software shall not be removed from the PESQ software or any installation of it;

Evaluation of Talker Quality (ECHO) measurement technology included in this product is protected by copyright and is provided under license from OPTICOM GmbH, Erlangen, , 2011 - www.opticom.de Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the ECHO software in whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the ECHO software or for normal security back-up purposes; prevent the End- from modifying, translating, reverse-engineering or decompiling the ECHO software except to the extent permitted by law; require that the acknowledgement of the rights in the ECHO software shall not be removed from the ECHO software or any installation of it;

Libresample library and libVLC library distributed under LGPL license. For detailed information, see license files located in the software installation directory.

Skype is a trade mark of Skype or its related companies. This product/application has not been approved or endorsed by Skype, Skype Communications S.a.r.l. or any of their related companies. The license management portion of this Licensee Application is based on:

Page 390

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

SentinelRMS* © 1989-2006 SafeNet, Inc. All rights reserved

SentinelRMSe* © 1989-2006 SafeNet, Inc. All rights reserved

Iperf copyright. Copyright (c) 1999-2006, The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 5. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. You may receive the Software Product in more than one medium. Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive, you may use only that one medium that is appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. You may not use or install the other medium on any system. You may not loan, rent, lease or otherwise transfer the other medium to another , except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of the Software Product. 6. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. You agree to keep in confidence and not to disclose in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information related to the Software Product. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by Anite Network Testing Ltd related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to protect your own like data and information, but with not less than that due care exercised by a reasonably prudent person under the same or similar circumstances. 7. U.S. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Product and documentation are provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19, as applicable.

Page 391

NEMO OUTDOOR MANUAL

8. LIMITED WARRANTY. Anite Network Testing Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of three (3) months from the date of receipt, and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the Software Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from the date of receipt. To the extent that implied warranties are disclaimable, they are disclaimed in paragraph 10. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow disclaimers of or limitations on duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation may not apply to you. Any implied warranties on the Software Product and, as applicable, third party hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to three (3) months and one (1) year respectively. 9. CUSTOMER REMEDIES. Anite Network Testing Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at Anite Network Testing Ltd option, either (a) return of the price paid, or (b) repair or replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty contained in this EULA and which is returned to Anite Network Testing Ltd. The Limited Warranty contained herein is void if failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident, abuse, misapplication or events beyond the control of Anite Network Testing Ltd including, but not limited to Acts of God, acts of nature or acts of war. Any replacement Software Products or hardware will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Anite Network Testing Ltd is not responsible for ensuring adequate backup and storage for your data or records. 10. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Anite Network Testing Ltd disclaims all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and non-infringement of third-party rights, with regard to the Software Product, the accompanying written materials, and any accompanying hardware. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have others which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction. 11. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event shall Anite Network Testing Ltd or its suppliers be liable for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation, special, incidental, consequential, punitive or indirect damages for personal injury, loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use this Software Product, even if Anite Network Testing Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such damages. In any case, Anite Network Testing Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this EULA shall be limited to the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party hardware accompanying the Software Product. The Limitations of Liability contained in this Section apply to claims of every kind, whether based on contract law, tort law or otherwise, even if these limitations have the effect of exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence, fault or other conduct. Because some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages, the above limitation may not apply to you.

Page 392